Canon PowerShot G1 X Mark III User Guide

Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Camera User Guide
●● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Instructions”
(= 15) section, before using the camera.
●● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera
properly.
●● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at
right.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
ENGLISH
© CANON INC. 2017
CT0-D123-A
1
Before Use
Compatible Memory Cards
Before Use
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
Basic Guide
●● SD memory cards*1
Advanced Guide
●● SDHC memory cards *1*2
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
●● SDXC memory cards*1*2
Camera Basics
*1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*2
Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
verified to work with the camera.
UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Neck Strap
Strap Adapter
Lens Cap
Lens Cap Cord
Accessories
* Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack.
Appendix
●● Printed matter is also included.
●● A memory card is not included (= 2).
Index
2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
Conventions in This Guide
Before Use
●● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
●● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
Basic Guide
●● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
controls in “Part Names” (= 4).
[ ]
Continuous ring (2) on front
[
] Front dial (3) on front
[ ]
Up button (11) on back
[ ]
Left button (12) on back
[ ]
Right button (18) on back
[ ]
Down button (19) on back
Control dial (16) on back
[ ]
Advanced Guide
●● The user’s unauthorized photographing or recording (video and/or
sound) of people or copyrighted materials may invade the privacy of
such people and/or may violate others’ legal rights, including copyright
and other intellectual property rights. Note that restrictions may apply
even when such photographing or recording is intended solely for
personal use.
●● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Customer Support Help Desk.
●● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●● Although the screen (monitor) and viewfinder are produced under
extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than
99.99% of the pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some
pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does
not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
●●
: Important information you should know
●●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●●
: Indicates touch-screen operations
●● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● = xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
Wireless Features
●● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
Setting Menu
●● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
Accessories
●● The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Appendix
Index
3
Part Names
(1)
(5) (6) (7)
(8) (9) (10)
(11)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(2)
(15)
(12)
(5)
(16)
(17)
(8)
(1)
(14)
(1)
Lens
(9)
(2)
Continuous ring
(10) Diopter adjustment dial
(3)
Front dial
(11) Mode dial release button
(4)
Zoom lever
Shooting:‌[
[
Playback:‌[
[
Hot shoe
(12) Mode dial
(telephoto)] /
(wide angle)]
(magnify)] /
(index)]
(13) Speaker
(14) Lamp
(15) Microphone
(N-Mark)*1
(5)
Strap mount
(16)
(6)
Exposure compensation dial
(17) Tripod socket
(7)
Shutter button
(18) Memory card/battery cover
(8)
Flash
Used with NFC features (= 144).
Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (= 176).
(15)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(18)
(13)
*1
*2
(3)
Before Use
(9)
Other Shooting Modes
(1)
Screen (monitor)*2
(2)
Viewfinder
(12) [ (Macro)] / [
/ Left button
(3)
Power button
(13) Indicator / USB charge lamp
(4)
Remote switch terminal
(14) [
(Playback)] button
(5)
DIGITAL terminal
(15) [
(AF frame selector)] button
(16) Control dial
P Mode
(Manual focus)]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
(6)
HDMITM terminal
(7)
[
(8)
Serial number (Body number)
(18) [ (Flash)] / Right button
Setting Menu
(9)
Movie button
(Information)] /
(19) [
Down button
Accessories
(10) [
(17) [
(Wi-Fi)] button
(AE lock)] button
(Drive mode)] /
(11) [
[ (Single-image erase)] /
Up button
(20) [
(Quick Set menu/Set)] button
] button
Appendix
zzYou can turn the control dial to perform
most of the operations possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, such as choosing
items and switching images.
Index
4
Table of Contents
Before Use
Package Contents..................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information.................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide........................................................ 3
Part Names............................................................................... 4
Common Camera Operations................................................. 13
Safety Instructions................................................................... 15
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 17
Touch-Screen Operations....................................................... 17
Touching.....................................................................................17
Dragging.....................................................................................17
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 18
Attaching Accessories................................................................18
Holding the Camera....................................................................18
Charging the Battery Pack..........................................................19
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card....................20
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card......................21
Using the Screen........................................................................21
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation...........................21
Setting the Date and Time..........................................................21
Changing the Date and Time..................................................22
Display Language.......................................................................23
Trying the Camera Out............................................................ 23
Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................23
Playback.....................................................................................24
Erasing Images......................................................................25
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics................................................................. 26
On/Off...................................................................................... 26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)..............................27
Shutter Button......................................................................... 27
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Viewfinder................................................................................ 28
Camera Basics
Shooting Modes...................................................................... 29
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting Display Options........................................................ 29
Quick Set Menu....................................................................... 30
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure Settings..............30
Other Shooting Modes
Menu Screen........................................................................... 31
P Mode
Touch-Screen Operations...........................................................32
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 32
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Indicator Display...................................................................... 33
Clock....................................................................................... 34
Playback Mode
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode....................................... 35
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings........................... 35
Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................35
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode....................................................37
Digest Movie Playback...........................................................38
Still Images/Movies................................................................38
Still Images.............................................................................38
Movies....................................................................................39
Scene Icons................................................................................39
Continuous Shooting Scenes.................................................40
Image Stabilization Icons............................................................41
On-Screen Frames.....................................................................41
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Common, Convenient Features.............................................. 42
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)...........................42
Zooming with the Continuous Ring.............................................42
5
Using the Self-Timer...................................................................42
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake........................43
Customizing the Self-Timer....................................................43
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter).....................44
Continuous Shooting..................................................................44
Other Shooting Modes..................................................... 56
Shooting with Face ID............................................................. 45
Applying Special Effects.......................................................... 59
Personal Information..................................................................45
Registering Face ID Information.................................................45
Shooting.....................................................................................46
Checking and Editing Registered Information............................47
Overwriting and Adding Face Information..............................48
Erasing Registered Information..............................................49
Image Customization Features............................................... 49
Changing the Aspect Ratio.........................................................49
Changing Image Quality.............................................................50
Capturing in RAW Format......................................................50
Using the Menu......................................................................51
Changing Movie Image Quality..................................................51
For NTSC Video.....................................................................51
For PAL Video.........................................................................52
Helpful Shooting Features....................................................... 52
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level..........................................52
Deactivating Auto Level..............................................................53
Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................53
Deactivating Image Stabilization............................................53
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting..........................................................................54
Customizing Camera Operation.............................................. 54
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing................................54
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up.......55
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots...........................55
Specific Scenes....................................................................... 56
Using Functions for Underwater Shots.......................................58
Shooting with an Underwater Focus Range...........................58
Correcting White Balance.......................................................58
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings (Self Portrait)............59
Making Skin Look Smoother (Smooth Skin)...............................60
Shooting Panoramas (Panoramic Shot).....................................60
Conveying a Sense of Speed by Blurring the Background
(Panning)....................................................................................61
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)......................................62
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect...............................................62
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect).............63
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Effect).......................63
Shots Resembling Watercolors (Water Painting Effect).............64
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect)............64
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect)..............65
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)............................................................65
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range)............66
Adding Artistic Effects.............................................................66
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Special Modes for Other Purposes......................................... 67
Shooting Starry Skies (Star).......................................................67
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape)...................................................................67
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)............................................67
Recording Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie)........................................................68
Adjusting Colors.....................................................................70
Adjusting the Focus................................................................71
Appendix
Index
6
Recording Various Movies....................................................... 72
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode..................................................72
Locking or Changing Image Brightness.................................72
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter.......................................................73
Correcting Severe Camera Shake..............................................73
Sound Settings...........................................................................74
Deactivating the Wind Filter...................................................74
Using the Attenuator...............................................................74
Recording Short Clips.................................................................74
Playback Effects.....................................................................74
Recording Time-Lapse Movies (Time-Lapse Movie)..................75
P Mode.............................................................................. 77
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)........................................ 77
Image Brightness (Exposure).................................................. 78
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation).............78
Deactivating Exposure Simulation..........................................78
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock).......................78
Changing the Metering Method..................................................79
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame.................79
Changing the ISO Speed............................................................80
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings...................................................80
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO speed NR)......80
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)................................81
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings...............................................81
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer)............................................................82
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority)......................82
Image Colors........................................................................... 83
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance).................................83
Custom White Balance...........................................................83
Manually Correcting White Balance.......................................84
Manually Setting White Balance Color Temperature..............85
Customizing Colors (Picture Style).............................................85
Customizing Picture Styles.....................................................86
Saving Customized Picture Styles.........................................87
Before Use
Basic Guide
Shooting Range and Focusing................................................ 88
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom).........................88
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)......................................................88
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode................................................89
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking).....................90
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)....................................90
Digital Tele-Converter.................................................................91
Choosing the AF Method............................................................91
1-point AF...............................................................................91
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)........................91
+Tracking.............................................................................92
Smooth Zone AF....................................................................92
Shooting with Servo AF..............................................................93
Changing the Focus Setting.......................................................93
Fine-Tuning the Focus................................................................94
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)..........................94
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)...............................95
Shooting with AF Lock................................................................95
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Flash....................................................................................... 96
Changing the Flash Mode..........................................................96
Auto........................................................................................96
On...........................................................................................96
Slow Synchro.........................................................................96
Off...........................................................................................96
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation.............................97
Shooting with FE Lock................................................................97
Changing the Flash Timing.........................................................98
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Settings......................................................................... 98
Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................98
7
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode...................................................... 99
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 99
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode).................................... 100
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode).... 100
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb).......................................... 101
Adjusting the Flash Output.................................................... 102
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values..................................................................... 102
Customizing Controls and Display........................................ 103
Customizing Display Information..............................................103
Customizing the Information Displayed................................104
Configuring Touch & Drag AF...................................................104
Changing the Settings of Touch and Drag Operations.........105
Restricting the Area of the Screen Available for Touch
and Drag Operations............................................................105
Assigning Functions to Controls...............................................105
Customizing the Quick Set Menu.......................................... 107
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu....................................107
Rearranging Menu Items......................................................107
Saving Shooting Settings...................................................... 108
Settings That Can Be Saved................................................108
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu)......109
Renaming My Menu Tabs..................................................... 110
Deleting a My Menu Tab....................................................... 110
Deleting All My Menu Tabs or Items..................................... 110
Customizing My Menu Tab Display...................................... 110
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)..................... 113
Histogram............................................................................. 113
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display........................... 113
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies)......................................................................... 114
Viewing by Date.................................................................... 114
Checking People Detected in Face ID...................................... 115
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Browsing and Filtering Images...............................................115
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Navigating through Images in an Index.................................... 115
Touch-Screen Operations..................................................... 116
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions........................ 116
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images......................... 117
Touch-Screen Operations..................................................... 117
Viewing Individual Images in a Group...................................... 118
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Editing Face ID Information....................................................119
Changing Names...................................................................... 119
Erasing Names......................................................................... 119
Playback Mode
Image Viewing Options......................................................... 120
Wireless Features
Magnifying Images...................................................................120
Touch-Screen Operations.....................................................120
Double-Touch Magnification.................................................120
Viewing Slideshows..................................................................121
Setting Menu
Accessories
Protecting Images................................................................. 121
Playback Mode................................................................111
Using the Menu........................................................................121
Choosing Images Individually...................................................122
Selecting a Range....................................................................122
Protecting All Images at Once..................................................123
Clearing All Protection at Once............................................123
Playback................................................................................. 111
Erasing Images..................................................................... 123
Touch-Screen Operations..................................................... 112
Switching Display Modes.......................................................... 113
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed................. 113
Before Use
Appendix
Index
Erasing Multiple Images at Once..............................................124
Choosing a Selection Method..............................................124
Choosing Images Individually...............................................124
8
Selecting a Range................................................................125
Specifying All Images at Once..............................................125
Wireless Features.......................................................... 141
Rotating Images.................................................................... 125
Using Wi-Fi Features................................................................141
Using Bluetooth® Features.......................................................141
Using the Menu........................................................................125
Deactivating Auto Rotation.......................................................126
Tagging Images as Favorites................................................ 126
Using the Menu........................................................................126
Convenient Control: Touch Actions....................................... 127
Using Touch Actions Functions.................................................127
Changing Touch Actions Functions..........................................127
Assignable Functions...........................................................128
Editing Still Images................................................................ 128
Resizing Images.......................................................................128
Using the Menu........................................................................129
Cropping...................................................................................129
Applying Filter Effects...............................................................130
Correcting Red-Eye..................................................................131
Processing RAW Images with the Camera........................... 132
Using the Menu........................................................................133
Choosing Images Individually...............................................133
Selecting a Range................................................................133
Editing Movies....................................................................... 134
Reducing File Sizes..................................................................135
Image Quality of Compressed Movies.................................135
Erasing Movie Chapters...........................................................135
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)........................................ 136
Available Wireless Features.................................................. 141
Sending Images to a Smartphone......................................... 142
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending Images to a Bluetooth Enabled Smartphone.............142
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone..............144
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode.....................................................................144
Connecting via NFC in Playback Mode................................145
Connecting to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu.....................146
Using Another Access Point.....................................................147
Previous Access Points............................................................148
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Saving Images to a Computer............................................... 149
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Preparing to Register a Computer............................................149
Installing CameraWindow.....................................................149
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)....................................................................149
Saving Images to a Connected Computer................................150
Confirming Access Point Compatibility.................................150
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points................................151
Connecting to Listed Access Points.....................................153
Previous Access Points........................................................153
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service...................... 154
Registering Web Services........................................................154
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY...............................154
Registering Other Web Services..........................................156
Uploading Images to Web Services.........................................156
Choosing Themes for Albums..............................................136
Adding Background Music to Albums.......................................137
Creating Your Own Albums.......................................................138
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer........... 157
Combining Short Clips.......................................................... 139
Sending Images to Another Camera..................................... 159
Appendix
Index
Image Sending Options......................................................... 160
9
Sending Multiple Images..........................................................160
Choosing Images Individually...............................................160
Selecting a Range................................................................160
Sending Favorite Images.....................................................161
Notes on Sending Images........................................................161
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size).........162
Adding Comments....................................................................162
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync)........................ 162
Initial Preparations....................................................................162
Preparing the Camera..........................................................162
Preparing the Computer.......................................................163
Sending Images........................................................................163
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone.....164
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 164
Geotagging Images When You Shoot......................................164
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a Smartphone.............165
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi.........................................165
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth...................................166
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 167
Editing Connection Information................................................167
Changing a Device Nickname..............................................167
Erasing Connection Information...........................................167
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones..................168
Changing the Camera Nickname.........................................168
Returning the Wireless Settings to Default...............................169
Clearing Information of Devices Paired via Bluetooth........... 169
Setting Menu................................................................... 170
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions....................................... 170
Date-Based Image Storage......................................................170
File Numbering.........................................................................170
Formatting Memory Cards........................................................171
Low-Level Formatting...........................................................171
Changing the Video System.....................................................172
Electronic Level Calibration......................................................172
Resetting the Electronic Level..............................................172
Switching the Color of Screen Information...............................172
Using Eco Mode.......................................................................173
Power-Saving Adjustment........................................................173
Screen Brightness....................................................................173
World Clock..............................................................................174
Date and Time..........................................................................174
Lens Retraction Timing.............................................................174
Display Language.....................................................................175
Silencing Camera Operations...................................................175
Adjusting the Volume................................................................175
Customizing Sounds.................................................................175
Start-Up Screen........................................................................175
Hiding Hints and Tips................................................................176
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon................................................176
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel...........................................176
Metric / Non-Metric Display......................................................176
Checking Certification Logos....................................................176
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images..................177
Deleting All Copyright Information........................................177
Adjusting Other Settings...........................................................177
Restoring Default Camera Settings..........................................177
Restoring All Camera Defaults.............................................177
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions..........................178
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Accessories.................................................................... 179
System Map.......................................................................... 180
Optional Accessories............................................................. 181
Power Supplies.........................................................................181
10
Flash Units................................................................................181
Other Accessories....................................................................182
Printers.....................................................................................182
Photo and Movie Storage.........................................................182
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 183
Playback on a TV.....................................................................183
Charging via USB.....................................................................184
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery.............................185
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately)......................................185
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)...............................186
Using a Timer Remote Controller (Sold Separately)................186
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)...............................187
Speedlite EX Series.............................................................187
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)...............188
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately)..................................................................188
Using the Software................................................................ 189
Computer Connections via a Cable..........................................189
Checking Your Computer Environment................................189
Installing the Software..........................................................189
Saving Images to a Computer..................................................189
Printing Images..................................................................... 191
Easy Print.................................................................................191
Configuring Print Settings.........................................................192
Cropping Images before Printing..........................................192
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing................193
Available Layout Options......................................................193
Printing ID Photos................................................................193
Printing Movie Scenes..............................................................194
Movie Printing Options.........................................................194
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)...................................194
Configuring Print Settings.....................................................195
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images.............................195
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images...........................196
Setting Up Printing for All Images.........................................196
Clearing All Images from the Print List.................................196
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)...................196
Adding Images to a Photobook................................................197
Choosing a Selection Method..............................................197
Adding Images Individually...................................................197
Adding All Images to a Photobook.......................................197
Removing All Images from a Photobook..............................197
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Appendix......................................................................... 198
Troubleshooting..................................................................... 198
P Mode
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 202
On-Screen Information.......................................................... 204
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shooting (Information Display).................................................204
Battery Level........................................................................204
During Playback.......................................................................205
Info Display 1........................................................................205
Info Display 2........................................................................205
Info Display 3........................................................................206
Info Display 4........................................................................206
Info Display 5........................................................................206
Summary of Movie Control Panel.........................................206
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Functions and Menu Tables.................................................. 207
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode............................207
Quick Set Menu........................................................................209
Shooting Tab.............................................................................212
Set Up Tab................................................................................221
My Menu Tab............................................................................221
Playback Tab............................................................................222
Appendix
Index
Handling Precautions............................................................ 222
11
Specifications........................................................................ 223
Image Sensor...........................................................................223
Lens..........................................................................................223
Shutter......................................................................................223
Aperture....................................................................................223
Flash.........................................................................................223
Viewfinder/Monitor....................................................................223
Shooting...................................................................................224
Recording.................................................................................224
Power.......................................................................................225
Interface....................................................................................225
Operating Environment.............................................................226
Dimensions (CIPA Compliant)..................................................226
Weight (CIPA Compliant)..........................................................226
Battery Pack NB-13L................................................................226
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE..........................................226
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E.......................226
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Index..................................................................................... 227
Precautions for Wireless Features
(Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or Others)................................................229
Radio Wave Interference Precautions..................................229
Security Precautions............................................................229
Third-Party Software............................................................230
Personal Information and Security Precautions...................231
Trademarks and Licensing...................................................231
Disclaimer.............................................................................231
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
12
Applying special effects
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
Before Use
Smooth Skin
(= 60)
Monochrome
(= 62)
Soft Focus
(= 62)
Fish-Eye Effect
(= 63)
Like Oil Paintings
(= 63)
Like Watercolor Paintings
(= 64)
●● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-- = 35, = 37
●● Shoot yourself under optimal settings (Self Portrait)
-- = 59
●● Shoot panoramas (Panoramic Shot)
-- = 60
Camera Basics
Toy Camera Effect
(= 64)
Portraits
(= 56)
Matching specific scenes
Under Water
(= 56)
Advanced Guide
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting people well
Handheld Night
Scene (= 56)
Basic Guide
Fireworks
(= 56)
Starry Skies
(= 67)
Miniature Effect
(= 65)
P Mode
●● Focus on faces
-- = 35, = 56, = 92, = 94
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Without using the flash (Flash Off)
-- = 35
Playback Mode
●● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-- = 42
Wireless Features
●● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-- = 37
Setting Menu
●● Convey a sense of speed with a blurred background
-- = 61
Accessories
Appendix
Index
13
View
●● View images (Playback Mode)
-- = 111
●● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-- = 121
●● On a TV
-- = 183
●● On a computer
-- = 189
●● Browse through images quickly
-- = 115
●● Erase images
-- = 123
Save
●● Save images to a computer
-- = 189
Using Wi-Fi Features
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Send images to a smartphone
-- = 142
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Share images online
-- = 154
Other Shooting Modes
●● Send images to a computer
-- = 162
P Mode
●● Create an album automatically
-- = 136
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Record/View Movies
Wireless Features
●● Record movies
-- = 35, = 72, = 102
Setting Menu
●● View movies (Playback Mode)
-- = 111
Accessories
Print
●● Print pictures
-- = 191
Appendix
Index
14
Safety Instructions
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the
product or others.
WARNING
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
●● Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.
●● Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual for use
with the product.
●● Do not disassemble or modify the product.
●● Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
●● Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
●● Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as
the presence of smoke or a strange smell.
●● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner
to clean the product.
●● Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into
the product.
●● Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
●● Do not use the product where flammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
●● For products featuring a viewfinder, do not look through the viewfinder
at strong light sources such as the sun on a bright day or lasers and
other strong artificial light sources.
This may harm your vision.
●● Observe the following instructions when using commercially available
batteries or provided battery packs.
-- Use batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.
-- Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.
-- Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery
chargers.
-- Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with
metallic pins or other metal objects.
-- Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
-- When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals
with tape or other means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or
clothing, flush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of
eye contact, flush thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water
and seek immediate medical assistance.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC
adapter.
-- Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power
outlet using a dry cloth.
-- Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
-- Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the
power outlet.
-- Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come
into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power
outlet during lightning storms.
●● Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break
or modify the power cord.
●● Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or
shortly after use when the product is still warm in temperature.
Appendix
Index
●● Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods
of time.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
15
●● Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin
for extended periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness
and blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or
similar equipment is recommended when using the product in hot places
and for people with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.
●● Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is
forbidden.
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect
of electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.
CAUTION
Denotes the risk of injury.
●● Do not fire the flash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
●● Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any
product attached on a hook or other object may damage the product.
Also, do not shake the product or expose the product to strong
impacts.
●● Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
●● Flash emits high temperatures when fired. Keep fingers, any other
part of your body, and objects away from the flash unit while taking
pictures.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the flash.
●● Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low
temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury
when touched.
CAUTION
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
●● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense artificial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
Camera Basics
●● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
Playback Mode
●● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.
Wireless Features
●● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or fire.
Accessories
●● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
16
Basic Guide
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
The camera’s touch-screen panel enables intuitive operation simply by
touching or tapping the screen.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Touching
Camera Basics
Touch the screen briefly with your
finger.
Basic Operations
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzThis gesture is used to shoot, configure
camera functions, and so on.
Other Shooting Modes
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
P Mode
Dragging
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Touch the screen and move your finger
across it.
Wireless Features
zzThis gesture is used in Playback mode
to switch to the next image, or to change
the magnified image area, among other
operations.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
17
Initial Preparations
(2)
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching Accessories
1
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1 )
(1)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Attach the strap adapter.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzOn the other side of the camera, attach
the strap adapter the same way.
Other Shooting Modes
Attach the strap.
zzAttach the included strap to the strap
adapter as shown.
zzOn the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
3
Attach the lens cap.
zzRemove the lens cap from the lens
momentarily.
(2)
(1)
Before Use
zzAttach the included strap adapter to the
camera as shown.
2
(5 )
zzThread the smaller loop through the lens
cap to attach it as shown, and then attach
the lens cap cord to the strap.
P Mode
zzAlways remove the lens cap before
turning the camera on. Try clipping the
lens cap to the strap when the cap is not
in use.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzKeep the lens cap on the lens when the
camera is not in use.
Wireless Features
Holding the Camera
Setting Menu
zzPlace the strap around your neck.
zzWhen shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers
on it.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
18
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
(1)
(2)
zzAfter aligning the
marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
(2)
(1)
CB-2LH
Insert the battery pack.
Charge the battery pack.
zzCB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the charger into a power outlet (2).
zzCB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
zzThe charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
CB-2LHE
(2)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Power” (= 225).
●● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
●● As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
with
uncharged one.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzWhen charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
3
(1)
●● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
●● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Remove the battery pack.
Accessories
zzAfter unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
Appendix
Index
19
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory
Card
(1)
(2)
Open the cover.
(2)
2
(1)
(3)
(2)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzInsert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
4
(2)
Insert the battery pack.
Before Use
Camera Basics
zzMake sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
zzSlide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
(1)
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
zzRecording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(= 171).
1
3
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Close the cover.
P Mode
zzLower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
(1)
Playback Mode
zzHolding the battery pack with the
terminals in the position shown (1), hold
the battery lock toward (2) and insert
the battery pack toward (3) until the lock
clicks shut.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
zzIf you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
20
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
zzOpen the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
zzThe battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
zzPush the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
zzThe memory card will pop up.
(1)
zzYou can adjust the angle and orientation
of the screen as needed, to suit shooting
conditions.
zzTo protect the screen when the camera
is not in use, always keep it closed and
facing the camera body.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the
camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewfinder.
●● When including yourself in shots, you can view a mirror image
of yourself by rotating the screen around toward the front of the
] button,
camera. To cancel reverse display, press the [
choose [Reverse Display] on the [ 1] tab, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Setting the Date and Time
Using the Screen
(2)
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
zzOpen the screen (1) and rotate it toward
the lens 180° (2).
zzClose the screen in this orientation (3).
(3)
Playback Mode
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Turn the camera on.
Accessories
zzPress the power button.
●● The screen can only open to approximately 180° in direction (1).
Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will
damage the camera.
Appendix
zzThe [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
Index
21
2
Set the date and time.
Changing the Date and Time
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date and time.
zzWhen finished, press the [
Before Use
Adjust the date and time as follows.
]
] button.
1
Basic Guide
Access the menu screen.
zzPress the [
Advanced Guide
] button.
Camera Basics
2
3
Specify your home time zone.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4
Choose [Date/Time].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ 2] tab.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
]
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
P Mode
Finish the setup process.
zzPress the [ ] button when finished.
After a confirmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
zzTo turn off the camera, press the power
button.
●● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
●● You can also set the date and time by touching the desired item
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [ ][ ], followed
]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
by [
].
touching [ ][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
3
Change the date and time.
Wireless Features
zzFollow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (= 21) to adjust the settings.
zzPress the [
menu screen.
Setting Menu
] button to close the
●● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
●● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack, even if the camera is left off.
●● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 21).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
22
Display Language
Trying the Camera Out
Change the display language as needed.
1
2
Still Images
Enter Playback mode.
zzPress the [
Before Use
] button.
Access the setting screen.
zzPress and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [
] button.
Movies
Try out the camera by turning it on, shooting some still images or movies,
and viewing them.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Camera Basics
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Turn the camera on.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the power button.
3
Set the display language.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
zzOnce the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
zzThe startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] mode.
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [
].
Playback Mode
zzAim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
zzIcons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
●● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
] button.
pressing the [ ] button before you press the [
In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
●● You can also change the display language by pressing the
] button and choosing [Language
] on the [ 3] tab.
[
●● You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
Accessories
zzFrames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Zoom in or out, as needed.
Appendix
Index
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
23
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
Recording Movies
Before Use
1) Start recording.
1) Focus.
zzPress the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
(1)
zzPress the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFrames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Other Shooting Modes
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
zzIf [Raise the flash] is displayed, lift the
flash with your fingers. It will fire when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
flash, push it down with your finger, into
the camera.
2) Shoot.
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down.
zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
P Mode
2) Stop recording.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Playback
Setting Menu
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Accessories
Enter Playback mode.
zzPress the [
Appendix
] button.
zzYour last shot is displayed.
Index
zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
24
2
Choose images.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Erasing Images
zzPress and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
Camera Basics
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
zzTo access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
zzTo return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
zzMovies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
Before Use
●● You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust
the volume, quickly drag up or down across the screen during
playback.
zzTo view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
] icon.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose an image to erase.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Erase the image.
zzPress the [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
zzThe current image is now erased.
3
Play movies.
zzPress the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
zzPlayback now begins, and after the movie
] is displayed.
is finished, [
zzTo adjust the volume, press the [
buttons during playback.
][
]
Setting Menu
zzTo cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
●● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (= 124).
●● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
●● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (= 127).
Appendix
Index
●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
25
On/Off
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
Basic Guide
zzPress the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
Advanced Guide
zzTo turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Camera Basics
Playback Mode
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [
] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
zzTo turn the camera off, press the [
button again.
Other Shooting Modes
]
P Mode
●● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [
]
button.
●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (= 27).
●● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
] button.
retracted by pressing the [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of
inactivity.
The screen is automatically deactivated after about a minute of inactivity,
and in another minute, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself off.
To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but
the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (= 27).
●● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (= 173).
●● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (= 141), or when connected to a computer
(= 189).
Shutter Button
Before Use
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this guide, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
Basic Guide
1
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
Playback Mode
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
●● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
27
Viewfinder
Still Images
Movies
Shooting is easier with a viewfinder, which helps you concentrate on
keeping subjects in focus.
1
Switch between using the screen
and viewfinder as needed.
zzMoving the viewfinder near your eye will
activate its display and deactivate the
camera screen.
zzMoving the viewfinder away from your
eye will deactivate its display and activate
the camera screen.
2
Adjust the diopter.
zzTurn the dial to bring viewfinder images
into sharp focus.
●● Although the viewfinder is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective
or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera
damage or affect recorded images.
●● Some aspect ratio settings (= 49) will cause black bars to be
displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the
screen. These areas will not be recorded.
●● The screen will not be activated when you move your eye away
from the viewfinder if you have selected MENU (= 31) > [ 1]
tab > [Display settings] > [Display Control] > [Manual] and then
[Manual display] > [Viewfinder].
●● Display of shooting information will not be adjusted when you
hold the camera vertically if you have selected MENU (= 31) >
[ 1] tab > [Shooting information display] > [VF vertical display]
> [Off].
●● Display switches from the viewfinder to the camera screen for
some features.
●● You can configure display brightness (= 173) for the viewfinder
and camera screen separately.
●● To reduce the shooting screen, choose MENU (= 31) > [ 2]
tab > [VF display format] > [Display 2].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● The viewfinder display and camera screen cannot be activated at
the same time.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
28
Shooting Modes
Shooting Display Options
Before Use
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode. As you turn it, hold
down the mode dial release button in the middle of the dial.
Press the [ ] button to show or hide the grid lines and electronic level.
To configure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab >
[Shooting information display] (= 103).
Basic Guide
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
P, Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (= 77,
= 99).
(3)
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(= 23, = 35, = 37).
(4)
Special Scene Mode
Shoot with settings designed for
specific scenes, or add a variety of
effects (= 56).
Advanced Guide
●● Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing
the camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewfinder
(= 21).
●● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
●● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(= 113).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Movie Mode
For shooting movies (= 72,
= 102).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
29
Quick Set Menu
Configure commonly used functions in the
(Quick Set) menu.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(= 209).
1
Access the
zzPress the [
2
menu.
Choose a menu item.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzTo return to the previous screen, touch
the [ ] menu item, or touch the selected
option again.
Choose an option.
] icon can
zzItems labeled with a [
be configured by pressing the [
button.
Advanced Guide
zzTouch a menu item and then an option to
complete the setting.
(2)
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
or [
] dial to choose an option.
Basic Guide
zzTouch [ ] in the upper right of the screen
to access the Quick Set menu.
zzAvailable options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
3
Before Use
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure
Settings
] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
(1)
●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (= 177).
●● You can also exit by choosing [ ] in the menu items and
pressing the [ ] button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzYou can access the screen for options
] icon by touching
labeled with a [
[
].
Playback Mode
zzYou can access the screen for options
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching [ ].
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
]
Accessories
zzItems labeled with a [ ] icon can be
configured by pressing the [ ] button.
] icon can be
zzItems labeled with a [
configured by turning the [
] dial.
4
Appendix
Index
Confirm your choice and exit.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzThe screen before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you configured.
30
3
Menu Screen
Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
zzPress the [
2
] button.
Choose a tab.
zzTabs represent functions (1), such as
shooting ([ ]), playback ([ ]), or
settings ([ ]), or pages within each
function (2). Tabs are identified in this
guide by combining the function and
page, as in [ 1].
zzMove the zoom lever to choose the
function tab, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [
] dial to choose
the page tab.
Choose a menu item.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button.
zzFor menu items with options not shown,
first press the [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo return to the previous screen, press
] button.
the [
4
Other Shooting Modes
Choose an option.
zzWhen options are listed vertically, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose an option.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzWhen options are listed horizontally,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
5
Playback Mode
Confirm your choice and exit.
Wireless Features
zzPress the [ ] button to confirm your
choice and return to the menu item
selection screen.
Setting Menu
] button to return to the
zzPress the [
screen displayed before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1.
Accessories
Appendix
●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (= 177).
●● Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
playback mode (= 212 – = 222).
Index
31
Touch-Screen Operations
On-Screen Keyboard
Before Use
●● To choose tabs, press the [
] button to access the menu screen,
and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (= 45),
wireless connections (= 141), and so on. Note that the length and type
of information you can enter varies depending on the function you are
using.
Basic Guide
●● Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
●● Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item
selection screen.
●● For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
●● To configure menu items for which options are not shown, first touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the item, and then touch to choose the
].
option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
(1)
Entering Characters
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzThe amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
] is shown, you can touch [
●● When [
[ ] button, if you prefer.
] instead of pressing the
Entering Line Breaks
] is shown, you can touch [
●● When [
[
] button, if you prefer.
] instead of pressing the
] is shown, you can touch [
●● When [
[ ] button, if you prefer.
] instead of pressing the
] button again.
Camera Basics
zzTouch the characters to enter them.
●● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text fields)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
●● To dismiss the menu, press the [
Advanced Guide
zzTouch [
zzTouch [
][
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
].
Playback Mode
].
Wireless Features
Switching Input Modes
zzTo switch to numbers or symbols, touch
[ ].
Setting Menu
zzTouch [ ] to enter capital letters.
Accessories
zzAvailable input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Appendix
Deleting Characters
Index
zzTouch [
] to delete the previous
character.
zzTouching and holding [
characters at a time.
] will delete five
32
Confirming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
zzPress the [
●● For some functions, [
] button.
] is not displayed and cannot be used.
●● Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial to select characters or icons, and
then pressing the [ ] button. You can also move the cursor by
] dial. To return to the previous screen, press the
turning the [
] button.
[
Indicator Display
Before Use
The indicator on the back of the camera (= 4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Basic Guide
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green
Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures (= 99,
= 100), connected to a computer
(= 189), connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi,
or display off (= 27, = 173)
Orange
On
Charging via USB
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other Shooting Modes
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
P Mode
●● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or hit the camera. Doing
so may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
33
Clock
Before Use
You can check the current time.
Basic Guide
zzPress and hold the [
] button.
zzThe current time appears.
Advanced Guide
zzClock display switches to vertical
orientation when the camera is held
vertically while the clock is displayed.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo change the display color, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ] button again to cancel the
clock display.
P Mode
●● To display the clock when the camera is off, press and hold the
[ ] button, and then press the power button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
34
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
Before Use
Basic Guide
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Advanced Guide
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Camera Basics
Still Images
1
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Turn the camera on.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the power button.
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
zzThe startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [
P Mode
] mode.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [
].
Playback Mode
zzAim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Wireless Features
zzIcons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
the upper left of the screen (= 39,
= 41).
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzFrames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Appendix
Index
35
3
(1)
Zoom in or out, as needed.
2) Shoot.
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position is
displayed, along with the range of focus
(2).)
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down.
zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
Other Shooting Modes
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
1) Focus.
zzIf [Raise the flash] is displayed, lift the
flash with your fingers. It will fire when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
flash, push it down with your finger, into
the camera.
Basic Guide
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
(2)
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
frames are displayed to indicate image
areas in focus.
Before Use
(1)
P Mode
zzPress the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Wireless Features
zzFrames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Setting Menu
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
36
2)Adjust how the shot is composed,
as needed.
zzTo resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
zzWhen you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
3) Stop recording.
zzPress the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
zzRecording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
Clips recorded in this mode may be included in Story Highlights albums
(= 136).
1
Enter [
2
Compose the shot.
zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (= 35) to compose the shot and
focus.
zzFor more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shoot.
zzFollow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(= 35) to shoot a still image.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzThe camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [
] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
●● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
] mode, or
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
operating the camera in other ways.
●● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
] mode.
zzFollow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(= 35) and choose [ ].
Index
37
●● Digest movie image quality is automatically set to [
] for
] for PAL and cannot be changed (= 172).
NTSC or [
●● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (= 175).
●● Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following
] mode.
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
-- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40
seconds.
-- The digest movie is protected (= 121).
-- Daylight saving time (= 21) or time zone (= 174) settings
are changed.
-- A new folder is created (= 170).
●● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.
●● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (= 31) > [ 6] tab >
[Digest Type] > [No Stills].
●● Individual chapters can be edited (= 135).
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (= 114).
Still Images/Movies
●● If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
] button. To activate
turned on while holding down the [
] button, choose [Mute] on the [ 3]
sounds, press the [
tab, and then choose [Disable].
Still Images
●● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
●● If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the
subject. For details on the flash range, see “Flash” (= 223).
●● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Lens” (= 223).
●● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
●● A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
●● No shutter sound is played when “Sleeping” and “Sleeping
Babies” icons (= 39) are displayed.
●● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(= 55).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
38
Scene Icons
Movies
Before Use
Still Images
●● Before movie recording, lower the flash with your finger. During
recording, keep your fingers away from the microphone (1).
Leaving the flash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
muffled.
Movies
In [ ] and [
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (= 40).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Background
(1)
Subject
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Normal Backlit Dark*1 Sunsets Spotlights
●● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
●● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, follow the steps in “Recording Movies with Subjects at
the Same Size Shown before Shooting” (= 54).
●● Audio is recorded in stereo.
People
*2
*3
Moving People
*
*
Shadows on Face
*
Smiling
*3
Sleeping
*
Babies
*
Smiling Babies
Other Shooting Modes
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*3
–
–
–
*
3
–
–
–
3
–
–
–
*3
*3
–
–
–
Sleeping Babies
*
*
3
–
–
–
Moving Children
*
3
–
–
–
Other Subjects
*2
*3
Other Moving Subjects
*
*
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*2
*1
*2
*3
3
2
2
3
2
3
3
3
–
*
*
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
3
–
–
*3
–
–
–
Appendix
Index
Tripod used.
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
39
●● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
] is dark blue,
●● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
●● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
●● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
Continuous Shooting Scenes
The camera shoots continuously when you take a shot while an icon
for one of the following scenes is displayed. Pressing the shutter button
halfway while one of the scene icons is displayed shows another icon
([ ], [ ], or [ ]) indicating the type of continuous shooting to be used.
Smiling
(including Babies)
●● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive modes other than [ ] (= 40, = 44).
●● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the flash is set to [ ].
●● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (= 45). Confirm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (= 21).
●● Try shooting in [ ] mode (= 77) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Children
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Camera Basics
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam and the flash will not fire, and
the shutter sound will not be played.
Other Shooting Modes
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
●● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first
shot.
●● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
and then select [
[ ] dial).
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
40
Image Stabilization Icons
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in
macro shots (Hybrid IS).
For movies, [
] is displayed and [ ] image stabilization is also
applied.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when recording while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
recording movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
In [
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
●● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
detected as the main subject. Frames follow moving subjects within a
certain range as they are tracked to keep them in focus.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Try shooting in [ ] mode (= 77) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
●● To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [ ] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode
(= 95). Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue
frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 53). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
] is not available in [
] mode.
●● [
Appendix
Index
41
Common, Convenient Features
●● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (= 31) > [
> [Digital Zoom] > [Off].
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 12x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [
].
zzHold the lever until zooming stops.
3] tab
Basic Guide
Zooming with the Continuous Ring
Still Images
Before Use
Advanced Guide
Movies
Camera Basics
Use the continuous ring for finer subject resizing and faster zooming than
with the zoom lever.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTurn the [ ] ring counterclockwise to
zoom in or clockwise to zoom out.
Other Shooting Modes
zzZooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
(1)
2
Move the zoom lever toward [
again.
]
zzThe camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
zz(1) is the current zoom factor.
●● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the
zoom range.
-- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
-- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
-- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
●● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (= 50), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Playback Mode
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 30).
zzOnce the setting is complete, [
displayed.
Appendix
] is
Index
42
2
Shoot.
Customizing the Self-Timer
zzFor Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
Still Images
1
zzOnce you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a selftimer sound.
zzTwo seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
zzTo cancel shooting after the self-timer
has been triggered, press the [
]
button.
]
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
zzFollow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42) and choose [ ].
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42) to shoot.
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
zzFor Movies: Press the movie button.
zzTo restore the original setting, choose [
in step 1.
Before Use
Choose [ ].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzFollowing step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a value, and then press the
[ ] button twice.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [
displayed.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] is
Playback Mode
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42) to shoot.
Wireless Features
●● For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specified delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and color tone
are determined by the first shot. More time is required between
shots when the flash fires or when you have specified to take
many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory
card becomes full.
●● When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Appendix
Index
43
Shooting by Touching the Screen
(Touch Shutter)
Still Images
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your finger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1
Before Use
Enable the touch-shutter function.
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[ 2] tab > [Touch Shutter] > [Touch
Shutter] > [Enable] (= 31).
Movies
In [
] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Shooting” (= 224).
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] or
[
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [
] is displayed.
[
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
] or
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
2
Shoot.
zzTouch the subject on the screen to take
the picture.
zzThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
zzTo cancel touch shutter, choose [Disable]
in step 1.
●● Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [ ].
2
Shoot.
Playback Mode
zzHold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
●● During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
●● Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 42).
●● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
●● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
●● Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
●● With Touch Shutter (= 44), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during
continuous shooting remain constant, after they are determined
for the first shot.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
44
Shooting with Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function also enables you to find shots you have taken that include
registered people (= 116).
Registering people in advance also makes it easier to add them when
creating Story Highlights albums (= 136).
Personal Information
●● The camera stores face information (face images) registered using
Face ID, as well as entered personal information (names and
birthdays). Additionally, when registered people are detected, their
names will be recorded in still images. For this reason, after using
Face ID functions, be careful when giving the camera or images to
others, or when posting images online where many people can view
them.
●● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (= 49).
Registering Face ID Information
Before Use
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1
Access the setting screen.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 31).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
]
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
2
Setting Menu
Register face information.
Accessories
zzAim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
zzA white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
Appendix
Index
zzIf the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
45
5
zzAfter [Register?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
zzTo register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
zzThe [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.
3
zzRegistered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
zzPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(= 32).
zzTo register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date.
zzWhen finished, press the [
4
]
] button.
Save the settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzAfter a message is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
Continue registering face
information.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● The flash will not fire when following step 2.
●● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
] mode.
(= 39) will not be displayed in [
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not filled all 5 face info slots (= 45).
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Shooting
Setting Menu
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
Accessories
zzWhen you point the camera toward
people, the name of the person detected
as the main subject is displayed.
zzShoot.
zzDisplayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
Appendix
Index
46
●● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
●● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
●● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
●● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (= 119).
●● Because faces of babies and children change as they grow, you
should update their face info regularly (= 48).
●● Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
[Shooting Info] check box in “Customizing the Information
Displayed” (= 104) so that the names are not displayed.
●● If you don’t want names to be recorded in images, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose
[Off].
●● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (= 113).
●● Names recorded in continuous shooting (= 44) continue to be
recorded in the same position as the first shot, even if subjects
move.
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45), choose [Check/
Edit Info].
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person whose information you want
to check or edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Check or edit the information as
needed.
Playback Mode
zzTo check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Profile] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (= 45).
zzTo check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. To erase face information,
press the [ ] button on the screen
displayed, choose face information to
erase by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then
press the [ ] button. After [Erase?] is
displayed, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
47
●● Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children,
because their faces change as they grow.
As long as all 5 face info slots have not been filled, you can also add face
information.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45), choose [Add Face
Info].
2
Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
[ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4
Register face information.
Camera Basics
zzFollow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzRegistered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
●● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, first erase
unwanted existing info (= 49), and then register new face
information (= 45) as needed.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
zzIf five items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
zzIf less than five items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
48
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1
●● You can also erase names in image information (= 119).
Movies
Advanced Guide
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 30).
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person to erase, and
then press the [ ] button.
●● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (= 115), overwrite their info (= 119), or
search for images that include them (= 116).
Basic Guide
Still Images
Choose a person to erase their
information.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Before Use
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
zzFollow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45) and choose [Erase
Info].
2
Image Customization Features
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzOnce the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Wireless Features
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Setting Menu
Used for display on standard-definition televisions or similar display
devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series
sizes.
Accessories
Square aspect ratio.
●● Not available in [
] mode.
●● You can also configure this setting by choosing MENU (= 31)
> [ 1] tab > [Still Image Aspect Ratio].
Appendix
Index
49
Changing Image Quality
Capturing in RAW Format
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 7 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression
(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format
(= 50).
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 30).
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
●● [ ] and [ ] indicate different levels of image quality depending
on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of
pixels), [ ] offers higher image quality. Although [ ] images
have slightly lower image quality, more fit on a memory card. Note
that [ ]-size images are of [ ] quality.
] mode.
●● Not available in [
●● You can also change the image quality by accessing MENU
(= 31) > [ 1] tab > [Image quality].
When deciding the number of pixels based on print size, use the following
table as a guide for images with a 3:2 aspect ratio.
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.
JPEG
Images
Processed in the camera for optimal image quality and
compressed to reduce file size. However, the compression
process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to
their original, unprocessed state. Image processing may
also cause some loss of image quality.
RAW
Images
“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing.
The data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a
computer or printing. You must first process it on this
camera (= 132) or use the Digital Photo Professional
application (= 189) to convert images to ordinary JPEG
or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of
image quality during processing.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 30).
Playback Mode
zzTo capture in RAW format only, choose
the [ ] option.
Wireless Features
zzTo capture images in both JPEG and
RAW format simultaneously, choose the
JPEG image quality, and then press the
[ ] button. A [ ] mark is displayed next
to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow the
same steps and remove the [ ] mark
next to [RAW].
●● When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (= 189).
●● Digital zoom (= 42) is not available when capturing images in
RAW format.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
50
●● The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
●● You can also configure this setting by accessing MENU (= 31)
> [ 1] tab > [Image quality].
Changing Movie Image Quality
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate
indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined
automatically based on the NTSC or PAL setting (= 172).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ] button, choose the movie
quality menu item, and then choose the
desired option (= 30).
Using the Menu
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 31).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
zzTo capture in RAW format at the same
] dial and choose
time, turn the [
[ ] under [RAW]. Note that only JPEG
images are captured when [−] is selected.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [JPEG], and then choose
the image size and quality. Note that only
RAW images are captured when [−] is
selected.
zzWhen finished, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen.
●● [RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
For NTSC Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Playback Mode
Frame Rate
Wireless Features
Details
Setting Menu
1920 x 1080
59.94 fps
1920 x 1080
29.97 fps
1920 x 1080
23.98 fps
1280 x 720
29.97 fps
For shooting in HD.
640 x 480
29.97 fps
For shooting in standard
definition.
For shooting in full HD.
] enables movies
[
with smoother motion.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
51
For PAL Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Helpful Shooting Features
Frame Rate
Details
1920 x 1080
50.00 fps
1920 x 1080
25.00 fps
1280 x 720
25.00 fps
For shooting in HD.
640 x 480
25.00 fps
For shooting in standard
definition.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
Still Images
For shooting in full HD.
Movies
Advanced Guide
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display the electronic level.
zzPress the [ ] button several times to
display the electronic level.
●● Black bars (displayed on the left and right in [
] and
] modes and on the top and bottom in [
],
[
], [
], [
], [
], [
], and
[
] modes) indicate image areas not recorded.
[
●● You can also configure this setting by choosing MENU (= 31)
> [ 7] tab > [Movie rec. size].
2
(1)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Straighten the camera.
zz(1) indicates the front-back orientation
and (2) the left-right orientation.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzIf the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
(2)
●● If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
] button and check the setting in [ 1] tab > [Shooting
[
information display] (= 103).
●● The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
●● If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
●● Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
level the camera (= 172).
] mode.
●● Not available in [
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
52
Deactivating Auto Level
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Deactivating Image Stabilization
Auto leveling keeps movies straight. To cancel this feature, choose
[Disable].
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[ Auto level] on the [ 4] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 31).
zzChoose [Disable], and press the [
button again (= 31).
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
1
]
Camera Basics
Access the setting screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [
] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (= 31).
●● Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects
are enlarged (= 54).
2
Other Shooting Modes
Configure the setting.
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [IS Mode], press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
desired option (= 31).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions
is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (= 41).
Off
Deactivates image stabilization.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
53
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same
Size Shown before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction
of significant camera shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto level.
zzSet [ Auto level] to [Disable] as
described in “Deactivating Auto Level”
(= 53).
zzFollow step 1 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (= 53) to access the [IS
Settings] screen.
zzChoose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[Low] (= 31).
Customizing Camera Operation
Before Use
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Menu Screen” (= 31).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Still Images
Camera Basics
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The lamp lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button
halfway in low-light conditions. This lamp can be deactivated.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[AF-assist beam firing] on the [ 3] tab,
and then choose [Disable].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Enable].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
●● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(= 53).
]
●● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
] (PAL).
(NTSC) or [
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
54
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images
Movies
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
A red-eye reduction lamp lights up to reduce red-eye when the flash is
used in low-light shots. This lamp can be deactivated.
1
2
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Image review] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose the desired option.
Access the [Flash Control] screen.
zzPress the [
Control] on the [
the [ ] button.
zzChoose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off].
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [2 sec.].
] button, choose [Flash
5] tab, and then press
Configure the setting.
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed after shots.
Before Use
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specified time. Even while the
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing
the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off
No image display after shots.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
55
Specific Scenes
Before Use
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.
Basic Guide
1
Enter [
Advanced Guide
] mode.
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [
].
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a shooting mode.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(= 30).
P Mode
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shoot.
●● You can also choose a shooting mode by touching [
].
upper left after you set the mode dial to [
Playback Mode
] in the
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
Accessories
zzTake shots of people with a softening
effect.
Appendix
Index
56
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night
Scene)
Still Images
Movies
zzBeautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
zzA single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Shooting Underwater (Underwater)
Still Images
Movies
zzNatural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
optional waterproof case (= 182).
zzThis mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
available color-compensating filter
(= 58).
●● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
●● In [ ] and [ ] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO
speed (= 80) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
●● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
●● In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (= 53).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [
]
mode instead of [ ] mode will give better results (= 35).
●● In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
●● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(= 31) > [ 1] tab > [Rec. Mode].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
Accessories
zzVivid shots of fireworks.
Appendix
Index
57
Using Functions for Underwater Shots
●● You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired focus range, and then touching it again.
Shooting with an Underwater Focus Range
Still Images
Movies
If focusing is difficult in [ ] mode (= 56) with a focus range of [ ],
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
1
Configure the setting.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
zzPress the [ ] button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Focus Range
Shoot.
Description
Underwater Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for
Macro
even closer shots.
Quick
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting
opportunities when shooting subjects some distance
away. Especially effective for moving subjects.
Manual
focus
Focus on subjects manually (= 89).
Refer to “Lens” (= 223) for details on the range of each focus range.
●● In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
●● In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
grainy at some recording pixel settings (= 50).
] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In
●● In [
this case, try setting the focus range to [ ].
Correcting White Balance
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Camera Basics
White balance can be manually corrected in [ ] mode (= 56). This
adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available colorcompensating filter.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [ ].
Other Shooting Modes
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
2
P Mode
Choose white balance.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu.
3
Playback Mode
Adjust the setting.
zzTurn the [
] dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A, and then
press the [ ] button.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●● B represents blue and A, amber.
●● White balance can also be manually corrected by recording
custom white balance data (= 83) before following the
preceding steps.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
58
Applying Special Effects
Item
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings
(Self Portrait)
For self-portraits, customizable image processing includes skin smoothing
as well as brightness and background adjustment to make yourself stand
out.
1
Choose [
].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
2
(2)
Choose from [
defocusing.
] or one of five levels of background
Choose from five levels of brightness.
Choose from five levels of skin smoothing. Skin smoothing
is optimized for the main subject’s face.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
To use touch shutter, choose [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Areas other than people’s skin may be modified, depending on
the shooting conditions.
●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Open the screen.
zzOpen the screen as shown.
(1)
3
Details
Configure the setting.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● In [ ] flash mode, background defocusing is set to [
] and
cannot be changed.
●● In [ ] mode, the time left before shooting is shown on the top of
the screen when you activate the self-timer by selecting [ ], or
by selecting [ ] and setting the time to 3 seconds or more.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
zzOn the screen, touch the icon of the
setting to configure.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
zzChoose the desired option.
zzTo return to the previous screen, touch
[ ].
4
Index
Shoot.
59
Making Skin Look Smoother (Smooth Skin)
Still Images
Shooting Panoramas (Panoramic Shot)
Movies
You can enhance skin tone to make it look smoother.
1
Choose [ ].
Still Images
1
] button.
2
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an effect level, and then
press the [ ] button.
Advanced Guide
] mode.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a shooting direction.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ] button and choose the
direction you will shoot.
P Mode
zzAn arrow is displayed showing the
direction to move the camera.
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Enter [
Basic Guide
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [
].
Choose an effect level.
zzPress the [
Movies
Create a panorama combining shots captured continuously as you move
the camera one direction while holding the shutter button all the way
down.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
2
Before Use
3
Shoot.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Focus.
Playback Mode
zzPress the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
●● Areas other than people’s skin may be modified, depending on
the shooting conditions.
●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
(2)
4
Wireless Features
Shoot.
Setting Menu
zzHolding the shutter button all the way
down, move the camera at a constant
speed in the direction of the arrow.
Accessories
zzThe area displayed clearly (1) is
captured.
(1)
zzA shooting progress indicator is displayed
(2).
Appendix
Index
zzShooting stops when you release the
shutter button, or when the progress
indicator is completely blue.
60
●● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
●● Shooting may stop midway if you move the camera too slowly or
quickly. However, the panorama created up to that point will still
be saved.
] mode are large. Use a
●● Images created from shots in [
computer or other device to reduce panorama images if you will
print them by inserting a memory card in a Canon printer.
If panoramas are not compatible with certain software or Web
services, try resizing them on a computer.
●● The following subjects and scenes may not be stitched correctly.
-- Subjects that are moving
-- Subjects that are nearby
-- Scenes where the contrast varies greatly
-- Scenes with long stretches of the same color or pattern, such
as the sea or sky
●● You can also set the shooting direction by touching [
].
Conveying a Sense of Speed by Blurring the
Background (Panning)
Still Images
Movies
By panning, you can blur the background to convey a sense of speed. The
camera will detect and correct subject blurring, so the subject will remain
relatively clear and sharp.
1
Choose [
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
2
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot.
zzBefore shooting, press the shutter button
halfway as you move the camera so that
it follows the subject.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzKeep the moving subject in the frame
displayed, and press the shutter button all
the way down.
Playback Mode
zzEven after you have pressed the shutter
button fully, continue moving the camera
to follow the subject.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
●● To adjust the effect level, turn the [
] dial.
●● You can move the frame by dragging it or touching the screen.
●● For best results, hold the camera securely in both hands, with
your elbows close to your body, and rotate your whole body to
follow the subject.
●● This feature is more effective for subjects moving horizontally,
such as cars or trains.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
61
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)
Still Images
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Movies
Take monochrome pictures with a gritty, rough feeling.
1
Choose [
].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the [
level.
] dial to choose an effect
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [ ].
Camera Basics
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the [
level.
] dial to choose an effect
Other Shooting Modes
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shoot.
Playback Mode
●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
62
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Still Images
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.
1
Choose [
].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the [
level.
] dial to choose an effect
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Movies
Make subjects look more substantial, like subjects in oil paintings.
1
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [ ].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
2
Camera Basics
Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the [
level.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] dial to choose an effect
Other Shooting Modes
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
P Mode
Shoot.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
63
Shots Resembling Watercolors
(Water Painting Effect)
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Soften colors, for photos resembling watercolor paintings.
1
Choose [ ].
Still Images
1
2
] dial to choose an effect
Advanced Guide
].
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a color tone.
zzTurn the [
tone.
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Choose [
Basic Guide
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [
].
Choose an effect level.
zzTurn the [
level.
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera, with
vignetting (darker, blurred image corners) and modified color overall.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
2
Before Use
Other Shooting Modes
] dial to choose a color
P Mode
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Shoot.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shoot.
Standard
Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
64
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Still Images
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [
].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
zzA white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzMove the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
zzTurn the [
4
] dial to choose the speed.
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
Speed
Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Approx. 6 sec.
Camera Basics
Approx. 3 sec.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
●● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [ ][ ] buttons.
●● To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
[ ][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
●● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
] and [ ] at
●● Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [
] (= 49). These quality settings cannot
an aspect ratio of [
be changed.
●● You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
65
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Adding Artistic Effects
Still Images
1
Choose [
].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
2
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ].
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washedout highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in highcontrast shots.
Shoot.
zzHold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
Before Use
zzTurn the [
] dial to choose an effect.
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Natural
Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard
Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid
Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold
Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
●● Subjects are displayed larger than in other modes.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (= 53).
●● Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
●● [ ] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway
in bright conditions, indicating automatic adjustment for optimal
image brightness.
Appendix
Index
66
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)
Still Images
Movies
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
1
Choose [ ].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Secure the camera.
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
3
Shoot.
●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
Display] > [On] (= 172) before shooting.
●● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (= 31) > [ 6] tab >
[Star Emphasis] > [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
●● Try switching to manual focus mode (= 89) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Other Shooting Modes
Still Images
Movies
P Mode
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Choose [ ].
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
Wireless Features
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
Appendix
Index
zzTurn the [
] dial to choose the
shooting duration.
●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
67
3
Secure the camera.
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
zzPress the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and
then shooting begins.
zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
zzTo cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note that
cancellation may take up to about 30
seconds.
●● If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Recording Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images
Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specified
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
1
Choose [
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 56) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
P Mode
zzZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
2
Playback Mode
Configure movie settings.
zzPress the [ ] button.
●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
Display] > [On] (= 172) before shooting.
●● Try switching to manual focus mode (= 89) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
Wireless Features
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then choose
the desired option.
3
Setting Menu
Secure the camera.
Accessories
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Appendix
Index
68
4
Check the brightness.
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
zzSwitch to Playback mode (= 111) and
check image brightness.
zzTo adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level on the shooting screen.
Check brightness again by taking another
shot.
5
Shoot.
zzPress the movie button. Recording
begins, and the indicator on the back of
the camera blinks.
zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
zzTo cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 30 seconds.
Item
Save
Stills
Options
Enable, Disable
Effect
Shot Interval
Frame Rate
Shooting
Time
Auto
exposure
15 sec., 30 sec.,
1 min.
,
,
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Details
You can choose to save each
shot collected before the movie
is created. Note that when
[Enable] is selected, [Effect] is
not available.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose movie effects, such as
star trails.
Camera Basics
Choose the interval between
each shot.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose the movie frame rate.
Other Shooting Modes
60 min., 90 min.,
Unlimited
Choose the length of the
recording session. To record
until the battery runs out,
choose [Unlimited].
Lock to 1st shot,
For each shot
Choose whether exposure is
determined by the first shot or
adjusted for each shot.
zzThe camera operates in Eco mode
(= 173) while shooting.
Before Use
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate
(for a one-hour session)
Interval between Shots
Frame Rate
NTSC
PAL
Setting Menu
Playback Time
15 sec.
16 sec.
15 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
4 sec.
1 min.
4 sec.
1 min.
2 sec.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
69
●● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
●● If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
●● A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:
[ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
●● Sound is not recorded.
●● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
Display] > [On] (= 172) before shooting.
●● You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU
(= 31) > [ 6] tab > [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting].
Stills] set to [Enable] are managed
●● Images saved with [Save
as a single group, and during playback, only the first image is
]
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [
is displayed in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped
image (= 123), all images in the group are also erased. Be
careful when erasing images.
●● Grouped images can be played back individually (= 118) and
ungrouped (= 118).
●● Protecting (= 121) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
●● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played
back using Image Search (= 116). In this case, images are
temporarily ungrouped.
●● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
magnifying (= 120), tagging as favorites (= 126), editing
(= 128), printing (= 191), setting up individual image printing
(= 195), or adding to a photobook (= 197). To do these
things, either view grouped images individually (= 118) or
cancel grouping (= 118) first.
●● Try switching to manual focus mode (= 89) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
Adjusting Colors
Before Use
Still Images
Colors can be manually adjusted in [
1
Choose a shooting mode.
zzChoose [ ] (= 67), [
[ ] (= 68).
2
Movies
] mode.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
] (= 67), or
Camera Basics
Choose color adjustment.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 30).
3
Other Shooting Modes
Adjust the setting.
P Mode
zzTurn the [
] dial or press the [ ][ ]
buttons to adjust the correction level for B
and A, and then press the [ ] button.
zzOnce the setting is complete, [
displayed.
●● B represents blue and A, amber.
●● Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [
button when the screen in step 2 is displayed (= 84).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] is
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
]
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
Appendix
Index
70
Adjusting the Focus
Still Images
Movies
Automatically adjust the focus to suit starry skies.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
zzChoose [ ] (= 67), [
[ ] (= 68).
2
●● The focus may not be adjusted under the following conditions. In
this case, try again from step 3.
-- There is a bright light source
-- Airplanes or other light sources or clouds crossed the sky
] (= 67), or
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● If adjustment fails, focus returns to the original position.
Camera Basics
Secure the camera.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
3
Other Shooting Modes
Frame the stars to capture.
zzPress the [
P Mode
] button.
zzTilt the camera so that the stars to
capture are inside the frame displayed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
4
Setting Menu
Adjust the focus.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ] button. [Adjusting star
focus] is displayed, and adjustment
begins.
zzAdjustment may take about 15
seconds. Do not move the camera until
[Adjustment completed] is displayed.
zzPress the [
5
Appendix
Index
] button.
Shoot (= 67, = 67, = 68).
71
Locking or Changing Image Brightness
Recording Various Movies
Still Images
Still Images
Enter [
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in
1/3-stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode
1
Before Use
Movies
1
Lock the exposure.
zzTouch [
] mode.
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 30).
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Advanced Guide
] to lock the exposure.
zzTo unlock the exposure, touch [
2
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
] again.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Adjust the exposure.
zzTurn the exposure compensation dial.
3
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot (= 72).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
2
Configure the settings to suit the
movie (= 207).
Playback Mode
3
Shoot.
Wireless Features
zzPress the movie button.
Setting Menu
zzTo stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Accessories
●● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(= 31) > [ 1] tab > [Rec. Mode].
●● Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons while [ ] is displayed.
] and
Appendix
Index
72
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
Auto slow shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
] button, choose
zzPress the [
[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ 8]
tab, and then choose [A-SLOW OFF]
(= 31).
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [A-SLOW ON].
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes, and subjects are enlarged more
than for [Standard].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzFollow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting” (= 54) to choose
[High].
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].
●● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
] (PAL).
(NTSC) or [
●● Auto slow shutter is only available for [
movies.
] and [
P Mode
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
]
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
73
Sound Settings
Recording Short Clips
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In
this case, you can deactivate the wind filter.
Still Images
Movies
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Story Highlights albums (= 136).
1
Enter [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
] mode.
Camera Basics
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Wind
Filter] on the [ 8] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (= 31).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 30).
zzChoose [Off] (= 31).
Other Shooting Modes
zzBlack bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Using the Attenuator
Set to [Auto] to reduce audio distortion by automatically activating and
deactivating the attenuator to suit shooting conditions. The attenuator can
also be set to [On] or [Off] manually.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Attenuator] on the [ 8] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 31).
Specify the shooting time and
playback effect.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
zzTurn the [ ] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and turn the [
] dial to set
the playback effect (= 74).
Wireless Features
3
zzChoose an option as desired (= 31).
P Mode
Setting Menu
Shoot (= 72).
zzA bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
Accessories
Playback Effects
2x
Playback in fast motion
1x
Playback at normal speed
1/2x
Playback in slow motion
Appendix
Index
Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and
played again in slow motion
74
●● Sound is not recorded in these clips.
] (for NTSC) or [
] (for PAL)
●● The movie quality is [
(= 51, = 52) and cannot be changed.
] recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is
●● During [
added to the bar showing the elapsed time.
Recording Time-Lapse Movies
(Time-Lapse Movie)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Time-lapse movies combine images that are shot automatically at a
specified interval. Any gradual changes of the subject (such as changes in
a landscape) are played back in fast motion. You can adjust the shooting
interval and number of shots.
1
Choose [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 30).
P Mode
zzBlack bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Configure movie settings.
Playback Mode
zzPress the [ ] button.
Wireless Features
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose an item. Choose
the desired option, and then press the
[
] button.
3
Setting Menu
Accessories
Secure the camera.
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
Appendix
Index
zzTo start shooting, press the movie button.
zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
zzTo cancel shooting, press the movie
button again.
zzThe camera operates in Eco mode
(= 173) while shooting.
75
Item
Details
Before Use
Shooting scene
Choose from three types of scenes.
Interval/ Shots
Choose the shooting interval (in seconds) and total
number of shots.
Basic Guide
Exposure
Choose whether exposure is determined by the first
shot or adjusted for each shot.
Advanced Guide
Review image
Display the previous shot for up to 2 seconds.
Time required
Length of the recording session. Varies depending
on the shooting interval and number of shots.
-- Scene 1: Up to 1 hour
-- Scene 2 or 3: Up to 2 hours
Playback time
Playback time of the movie created from captured
still images.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Fast-moving subjects may look distorted in movies.
Playback Mode
●● Sound is not recorded.
●● Focus remains constant during shooting, after it is determined for
the first shot.
●● The movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed.
]
●● The time-lapse movie frame rate is automatically set to [
] for PAL and cannot be changed (= 172).
for NTSC or [
●● You can also configure this setting by choosing MENU (= 31)
> [ 7] tab > [Time-lapse movie settings].
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
76
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting
style
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Enter [ ] mode.
Camera Basics
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customize the settings as desired
(= 78 – = 98), and then shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
●● If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(= 80) or activating the flash (if subjects are dark, = 96),
which may enable optimum exposure.
●● Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the
menu (= 30) and MENU
movie button. However, some
(= 31) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [ ] mode.
Setting Menu
●● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
Accessories
●● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode
(= 207).
Appendix
Index
77
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -3 to +3.
zzAs you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
1
Images are displayed at a brightness simulating the actual brightness as
captured. For this reason, screen brightness is also adjusted in response
to changes in exposure compensation. This feature can be disabled to
keep the screen at a brightness convenient for shooting, unaffected by
exposure compensation.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Lock the exposure.
Camera Basics
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zz[ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo unlock AE, press the [ ] button again.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
2
Deactivating Exposure Simulation
Before Use
P Mode
Compose the shot and shoot.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● AE: Auto Exposure
●● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
] dial
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
(Program Shift).
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Expo.
simulation] on the [ 1] tab, and then
choose [Disable] (= 31).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
78
Changing the Metering Method
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 30).
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
metering
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match
the shooting conditions.
Spot metering
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE
Point frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point
frame to the AF frame (= 79).
Center-weighted
average
Determines the average brightness of light
across the entire image area, calculated by
treating brightness in the central area as more
important.
1
Set the metering method to [
Before Use
Movies
].
zzFollow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method” (= 79) to choose
[ ].
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Configure the setting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (= 31).
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(= 91).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Not available when [AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] (= 92).
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
79
Changing the ISO Speed
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images
Movies
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 30).
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
●● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
●● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
●● The faster shutter speed used at higher ISO speeds reduces
subject and camera shake and increases the flash range.
However, shots may look grainy.
●● You can also set the ISO speed by accessing MENU (= 31) >
[ 5] tab > [ISO speed] > [ISO Speed].
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified
in a range of [400] – [25600], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of
three levels.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the setting screen.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [
] button, choose [ISO
speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (= 31).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzChoose [ISO Auto Settings] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Other Shooting Modes
Configure the setting.
P Mode
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (= 31).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO speed NR)
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
Accessories
zzPress the [
] button, choose [High
ISO speed NR] on the [ 6] tab, and
then choose the desired option (= 31).
Appendix
Index
80
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in
1/3-stop increments.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 30).
Choose [ ].
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [ ] (= 31).
2
For optimal brightness in the scenes you shoot, Auto ND filter reduces
light intensity to 1/8 the actual level, by an amount equivalent to three
stops. Choosing [ ] enables you to reduce the shutter speed and
aperture value.
Before Use
Other Shooting Modes
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
●● When selecting [ ], mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (= 53).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● ND: Neutral Density
Wireless Features
●● AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (= 96).
●● Continuous shooting (= 44) is not available in this mode.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● If exposure compensation is already in use (= 78), the value
specified for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
●● You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
] button when the exposure compensation screen
the [
(= 78) is displayed.
●● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [
(= 43).
Appendix
Index
]
81
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer)
Still Images
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority)
Still Images
Movies
Correct brightness and contrast automatically to avoid images that are too
dark or lack contrast.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 30).
Movies
Improve gradation in bright image areas to avoid loss of detail in subject
highlights.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Highlight tone priority] on the [ 5] tab,
and then choose [D+] (= 31).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● This feature may increase noise under some shooting conditions.
●● When the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and
images become too bright, set it to [Low] or [Disable].
●● Images may still be bright or the effect of exposure compensation
may be weak under a setting other than [Disable] if you use a
darker setting for exposure compensation or flash exposure
compensation. For shots at your specified brightness, set this
feature to [Disable].
●● With [D+], ISO speeds lower than [160] are not available. Auto
Lighting Optimizer is also disabled, in this case.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● You can also configure this setting by choosing MENU (= 31)
> [ 5] tab > [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
●● To keep the Auto Lighting Optimizer disabled in [ ] and [ ]
] button on the Auto Lighting Optimizer
modes, press the [
setting screen to add a [ ] mark to [Disable during man expo].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
82
Custom White Balance
Image Colors
Before Use
Still Images
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 30).
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Daylight
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade
For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy
For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten light
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
White
fluorescent light
For shooting under white fluorescent lighting.
Flash
For shooting with the flash.
Underwater
For shooting underwater.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(= 83).
Color temp.
For manually setting a white balance color
temperature (= 85).
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shoot a white object.
Camera Basics
zzAim the camera at a sheet of paper or
other plain white subject, so that white
fills the screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFocus manually and shoot (= 89).
2
Other Shooting Modes
Choose [Custom WB].
zzChoose [Custom WB] on the [ 6] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
P Mode
zzThe custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
3
Playback Mode
Load the white data.
zzSelect your image from step 1, and then
press [ ].
Wireless Features
zzOn the confirmation screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], press
the [ ] button, and then press the [ ]
button again.
Setting Menu
] button to close the
zzPress the [
menu.
4
Choose [
Accessories
].
Appendix
Index
zzFollow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (= 83) to
choose [ ].
83
●● Shots in step 1 that are too bright or dark may prevent you from
setting the white balance correctly.
●● A message is displayed if you specify an image in step 3 that is
not suitable for loading white data. Choose [Cancel] to choose a
different image. Choose [OK] to use that image for loading white
data, but note that it may not produce a suitable white balance.
●● If [Unselectable image.] is displayed in step 3, choose [OK] to
clear the message and specify another image.
”] is displayed in step 3, press the [ ] button to
●● If [Set WB to “
].
return to the menu screen, and then choose [
●● Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white
balance.
●● The current white balance and related settings are disregarded
when you shoot in step 1.
2
Configure advanced settings.
zzTo configure more advanced settings,
press the [
] button and adjust
the correction level by turning the
[
][ ] dials or pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzTo reset the correction level, press the
[ ] button.
zzPress the [
setting.
Camera Basics
] button to complete the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
●● The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if
you switch to another white balance option (by following steps
in “Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)” (= 83)), but
correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance
data.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or colorcompensating filter.
1
Configure the setting.
zzFollow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (= 83) to
choose [ ].
●● B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
●● You can customize camera operation so that the B and A
] or
adjustment screen is accessed simply by turning the [
[ ] dial (= 105).
●● One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 5
mireds on a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion filter
density)
●● You can also configure this setting by choosing MENU (= 31)
> [ 6] tab > [WB correction].
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
] dial to adjust the
zzTurn the [
correction level for B and A.
●● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
84
Customizing Colors (Picture Style)
Manually Setting White Balance Color Temperature
Still Images
Movies
A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature.
zzFollow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (= 83) to
choose [ ].
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Choose a Picture Style with color settings that express moods or
subjects well. Eight Picture Styles are available, and each can be further
customized.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 30).
zzPress the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Color temperature can be set at 100 K increments in a range of
2,500 – 10,000 K.
Auto
The color tone is adjusted automatically to suit the
scene. The colors look vivid, especially for blue
skies, greenery, and sunsets in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes.
Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable
for most scenes.
Portrait
For smooth skin tones, with slightly less
sharpness. Suited for close-up portraits. To modify
skin tones, adjust [Color tone] (= 86).
Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and
crisp images. Effective for impressive landscapes.
Setting Menu
Fine Detail
For detailed rendering of fine subject contours
and subtle textures. Makes images slightly more
vivid.
Accessories
Neutral
For retouching later on a computer. Makes
images subdued, with lower contrast and natural
color tones.
Faithful
For retouching later on a computer. Faithfully
reproduces the actual colors of subjects as
measured in daylight with a color temperature
of 5200K. Makes images subdued, with lower
contrast.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Appendix
Index
85
Monochrome
Creates black and white images.
User Def.
Add a new style based on presets such as
[Portrait] or [Landscape] or a Picture Style file,
and then adjust it as needed (= 85).
●● Default [Auto] settings are used for [
], [
], and [
]
until you add a Picture Style.
●● You can also configure this setting by accessing MENU (= 31)
> [ 6] tab > [Picture Style].
Color tone*1
Adjust skin color tone. Choose lower
values to produce redder hues, or higher
values to produce yellower hues.
Filter effect*2
Emphasize white clouds, the green of
trees, or other colors in monochrome
images.
N: Normal black-and-white image with
no filter effects.
Ye: The blue sky will look more natural,
and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: The blue sky will look slightly darker.
The sunset will look more brilliant.
R: The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall
leaves will look crisper and brighter.
G: Skin tones and lips will appear
muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Customizing Picture Styles
Customize these Picture Style settings as needed.
Strength
Adjust the level of edge enhancement.
Choose lower values to soften (blur)
subjects, or higher values to sharpen
them.
Fineness
Indicates the edge thinness that
enhancement applies to. Choose lower
values for more enhanced details.
Threshold
Contrast threshold between edges
and surrounding image areas, which
determines edge enhancement. Choose
lower values to enhance edges that do
not stand out much from surrounding
areas. Note that with lower values, noise
may also be emphasized.
Sharpness
Contrast
Adjust the contrast. Choose lower values
to decrease the contrast, or higher
values to increase it.
Saturation*1
Adjust the intensity of colors. Choose
lower values to make colors faded, or
higher values to make them deeper.
Not available with [
Only available with [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Choose from the following monochrome
hues: [N:None], [S:Sepia], [B:Blue],
[P:Purple], or [G:Green].
Toning effect*2
*1
*2
Before Use
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
].
].
Setting Menu
●● In [Sharpness], [Fineness] and [Threshold] settings are not
applied to movies.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
86
1
2
Access the setting screen.
zzChoose a Picture Style as described
in “Customizing Colors (Picture Style)”
(= 85).
zzPress the [
2
] button.
3
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item, and then choose an option by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial.
zzTo undo any changes, press the [
button.
zzWhen finished, press the [
]
] button.
Select a style to modify.
Before Use
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose the Picture Style that
serves as the basis.
Customize the style.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item to modify, and then customize it,
either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
zzWhen finished, press the [
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Using the CameraWindow application (= 189), you can also add
Picture Styles saved on a computer to the camera. For instructions,
refer to the CameraWindow Help.
P Mode
●● [Filter effect] results are more noticeable with higher [Contrast]
values.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● You can also choose a Picture Style to modify by touching [
in step 2.
Saving Customized Picture Styles
]
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Save presets (such as [
] or [
]) that you have customized as new
styles. You can create several Picture Styles with different settings for
parameters such as sharpness or contrast.
1
Setting Menu
Select a user-defined style number.
Accessories
zzChoose [
], [
], or [
] as
described in “Customizing Colors (Picture
Style)” (= 85).
zzPress the [
Appendix
] button.
Index
87
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Shooting Range and Focusing
Before Use
Still Images
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot at common focal lengths in a range of 24 – 72 mm (35mm film
equivalent).
1
2
Assign [
] to the [ ] ring (= 105).
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the range of focus, see “Lens” (= 223).
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a focal length.
zzTo change the focal length from
24 to 28 mm, turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise. Turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise to zoom in or clockwise
to zoom out.
●● Step zoom is not available when recording movies even if you
turn the [ ] ring.
Other Shooting Modes
●● If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
P Mode
●● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [ ] (= 43).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching [ ], and then touching it again.
Wireless Features
●● When you are using digital zoom (= 42), you cannot adjust the
zoom factor by turning the [ ] ring counterclockwise. However,
you can set the focal length to 72 mm by turning it clockwise.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
88
3
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near
the position you specified. For details on the range of focus, see “Lens”
(= 223).
1
Choose [
].
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
zz[
2
(1)
Fine-tune the focus.
Before Use
zzPress the shutter button halfway or touch
[ ] to have the camera fine-tune the
focal position (Safety MF).
zzTo cancel manual focus, choose [
step 1.
] in
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● When you focus manually, the AF method (= 91) is [1-point
AF] and cannot be changed.
●● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (= 42) or
digital tele-converter (= 91), or when using a TV as a display
(= 183), but the magnified display will not appear.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
Specify the general focal position.
zzReferring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnified display, press
the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the general
focal position, and then press the [ ]
button.
zzTo adjust the magnification, press the [ ]
button.
zzDuring magnified display, you can move
the focusing frame by pressing the [ ]
button and then the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
P Mode
●● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
●● You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting
MENU (= 31) > [ 4] tab > [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
●● To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (= 31) > [ 4] tab >
[Safety MF] > [Off].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● You can move the focusing frame by dragging on the screen in
step 2.
●● You can lock the focus during movie recording by touching [ ].
[ ] is then displayed.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
89
2
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab,
choose [Peaking], and then choose [On]
(= 31).
2
Configure the setting.
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (= 31).
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (= 96).
●● Continuous shooting (= 44) is not available in this mode.
Camera Basics
●● You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
[
(= 89).
●● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [ ]
(= 43).
Other Shooting Modes
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Playback Mode
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images
Wireless Features
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be set in three levels.
1
Choose [
Setting Menu
Accessories
].
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [ ] (= 31).
Appendix
Index
90
Digital Tele-Converter
1-point AF
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose the desired option (= 31).
zzThe view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
●● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
] for maximum telephoto, and when
lever all the way toward [
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (= 42).
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Effective for reliable
focusing. You can also move the frame by touching the screen (= 95).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● A yellow frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
●● To return the AF frame to the original position in the center, keep
] button held down.
the [
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)
Choosing the AF Method
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the auto focus (AF) mode to suit shooting conditions.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 31).
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
method to [1-point AF].
1
Setting Menu
Move the AF frame.
Accessories
zzPressing the [ ] button displays the AF
frame in orange.
] dial to move the
zzTurn the [ ] or [
AF frame, and press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons to fine-tune the position.
●● You can also configure this setting by accessing MENU (= 31)
> [ 3] tab > [AF method].
Wireless Features
Movies
zzTo return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [
button.
Appendix
Index
]
91
2
Resize the AF frame.
zzTo reduce the AF frame size, turn the
[ ] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
original size.
3
Finish the setup process.
zzPress the [
] button.
●● AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
zoom (= 42) or digital tele-converter (= 91).
●● You can also return the AF frame to the original position in the
] button.
center by holding down the [
●● You can link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (= 79).
●● You can also configure the AF frame size by pressing the
] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ 3] tab
[
(= 31).
+Tracking
Still Images
Movies
●● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the face of the main subject as determined by the camera. You
can also choose subjects yourself (= 95).
●● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
-- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
-- Subjects that are dark or light
-- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
●● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
●● Focusing is not possible on faces detected at the edge of the
screen (which are displayed with gray frames), even when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Smooth Zone AF
Other Shooting Modes
●● The camera focuses within your designated area. Effective when the
subject is hard to capture with [ +Tracking] or [1-point AF], because
you can specify where to focus. The camera will focus within the white
frame displayed. You can move the white frame by dragging it or
touching the screen.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● When you press the shutter button halfway, green frames are
displayed around positions in focus within the white frame.
Playback Mode
●● A yellow frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● Blue frames are displayed around positions in focus when you
select MENU (= 31) > [ 3] tab > [AF operation] > [Servo AF].
Accessories
●● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
●● Frames turn green after you press the shutter button halfway and the
camera focuses.
●● When no faces are detected, pressing the shutter button halfway
displays green frames around other areas in focus.
Appendix
Index
92
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
●● Exposure is not locked in Servo AF mode when you press the
shutter button halfway but is determined the moment you shoot,
regardless of the metering mode (= 79) setting.
●● Continuous shooting (= 44) with auto focus is possible by
specifying Servo AF. Note that continuous shooting is slower at
this time.
●● Depending on the distance to the subject and the subject’s speed,
the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
●● You can also configure this setting by accessing MENU (= 31)
> [ 3] tab > [AF operation].
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ONE
SHOT] in the menu, and then choose
[SERVO] (= 30).
2
Focus.
zzThe focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
●● The camera may not be able to shoot while focusing, even if you
press the shutter button all the way down. Keep holding down the
shutter button as you follow the subject.
●● A yellow frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
●● Using the self-timer (= 42) will restrict the AF mode to [ONE
SHOT].
●● Choosing MENU (= 31) > [ 3] tab > [AF Frame Size] >
[Small] will restrict the mode to [ONE SHOT].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
P Mode
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab, and
then choose [Disable] (= 31).
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Enable
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press
the shutter button halfway.
Disable
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● Choosing MENU (= 31) > [ 3] tab > [AF Frame Size] >
[Small] will restrict the mode to [Disable].
93
Fine-Tuning the Focus
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Still Images
Movies
You can fine-tune the focus after autofocusing by turning the continuous
ring.
1
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[AF+MF] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [On] (= 31).
2
Focus.
zzPress the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
zzTurn the [ ] ring. Referring to the
on-screen MF indicator (which shows
the distance and focal position) and the
magnified display, turn the [ ] ring to
adjust the focus.
zzTo enlarge or reduce the magnified
display, press the [ ] button.
zzTo cancel focusing, release the shutter
button.
4
Shoot.
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
●● Cannot be used with Servo AF (= 93).
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(= 91).
2
Enter Face Select mode.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzAim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAfter [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [ ] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzEven if the subject moves, the face frame
[ ] follows the subject within a certain
range.
zzIf a face is not detected, [
displayed.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] is not
Playback Mode
Choose the face to focus on.
zzTo switch the face frame [
detected face, press the [
Wireless Features
] to another
] button.
Setting Menu
zzOnce you cycle through all detected
faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed,
followed by the selected AF method
screen.
4
Accessories
Appendix
Shoot.
zzPress the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
Index
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
94
●● When [Face ID] is set to [On], only the name of the registered
person chosen as the main subject is displayed, even if other
registered people have been detected. However, their names will
be recorded in the still images (= 45).
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus
on.
1
2
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(= 91).
Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
zzTouch the subject or person on the
screen.
zzWhen the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
zzTo cancel Touch AF, touch [
3
].
●● If you prefer not to shoot when you touch the screen, choose
] > [ 2] tab > [Touch Shutter] > [Touch Shutter] >
[
[Disable] (= 31).
●● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
●● Even if you are shooting in [ ] mode (= 88), the camera will
revert to [ ] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to
focus.
●● To keep the frame in the same position (where you touched)
after shooting when [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable] (= 44),
choose MENU (= 31) > [ 2] tab > [Touch Shutter] > [AF
frame pos’n] > [Touch point].
zzPress the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
zzPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting with AF Lock
Still Images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.
1
Playback Mode
Lock the focus.
Wireless Features
zzWith the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
zzThe focus is now locked, and [
MF indicator are displayed.
Shoot.
Before Use
Setting Menu
] and the
Accessories
zzTo unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [ ]
button again.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
Appendix
Index
●● Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (= 44).
95
Slow Synchro
Flash
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (= 53).
●● In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.
Movies
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the flash range, see “Flash” (= 223).
1
2
Lift the flash.
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose a flash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
zzThe option you configured is now
displayed.
●● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the flash is lowered. Lift the flash in advance.
●● If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Off
For shooting without the flash.
P Mode
●● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired option, and then touching it again.
Setting Menu
Auto
Accessories
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
Appendix
On
Fires for each shot.
Index
96
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Shooting with FE Lock
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (= 78), you can adjust the
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
zzRaise the flash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [
] dial to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
zzThe correction level you specified is now
displayed.
●● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for flash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (= 31) and
choosing [ 5] tab > [Flash Control] > [Safety FE] > [Off].
●● You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (= 31) and choosing [ 5] tab > [Flash
Control] > [Flash Exp. Comp].
●● You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] screen (= 31)
as follows (except when an optional external flash is mounted).
-- Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.
-- When the flash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately
] button.
press the [
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (= 78), you can lock the exposure for flash
shots.
1
Raise the flash and set it to [ ]
(= 96).
2
Lock the flash exposure.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe flash fires, and when
[ ] is displayed, the flash output level is
retained.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo unlock FE, press the [ ] button again.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
Playback Mode
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
Wireless Features
●● FE: Flash Exposure
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
97
Changing the Flash Timing
Other Settings
Still Images
Movies
Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.
1
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (= 31).
2
Before Use
Configure the setting.
Basic Guide
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
You can keep image stabilization off until the moment you shoot.
Camera Basics
zzFollow the steps in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (= 53) to choose [Shoot
Only].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzChoose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (= 31).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
1st-curtain
The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd-curtain
The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
98
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (= 223).
1
Enter [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
] mode.
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [
].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
2
Set the shutter speed.
zzTurn the [
speed.
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
] dial to set the shutter
P Mode
customize the camera for your shooting style
●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
●● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (= 53).
●● The speed you set may be lowered automatically as needed if the
flash fires.
●● Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (= 100).
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● [
]: Time value
99
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (= 223).
1
Enter [
] mode.
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [
].
2
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
1
Enter [
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] mode.
zzTurn the [
(2).
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
Other Shooting Modes
Configure the setting.
zzTurn the [
speed (1).
●● [
]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
] and [
] modes, press the [
] button and set
●● In [
[Safety shift] on the [ 6] tab to [On] (= 31) to have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
Advanced Guide
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
] dial to set the aperture
●● Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
Basic Guide
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter”
(= 223) and “Aperture” (= 223).
Set the aperture value.
zzTurn the [
value.
Before Use
P Mode
] dial to set the shutter
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] dial to set the aperture value
Playback Mode
zzWhen the ISO speed is fixed, an
exposure level mark (4) based on
your specified values is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison
to the standard exposure level (3). The
exposure level mark is shown as [ ] or
[ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
zzThe ISO speed is determined and screen
brightness changes when you press
the shutter button halfway after setting
the ISO speed to [AUTO]. If standard
exposure cannot be obtained with your
specified shutter speed and aperture
value, the ISO speed is displayed in
orange.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
100
●● After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
●● Screen brightness may change depending on your specified
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ ].
●● Image brightness may be affected by Auto Lighting Optimizer
(= 82).
●● [ ]: Manual
●● Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specified
metering method (= 79).
●● The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
-- Adjust exposure by turning the exposure compensation dial.
-- Press the [ ] button to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness
changes accordingly.
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)
Before Use
With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
Basic Guide
1
Specify bulb exposure.
Advanced Guide
zzSet the shutter speed to [BULB], following
steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Shutter Speeds
and Aperture Values ([ ] Mode)”
(= 100).
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
zzShots are exposed for as long as you
hold the shutter button all the way down.
The elapsed exposure time is displayed
during exposure.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image
stabilization (= 53).
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● To avoid camera shake that may otherwise occur when pressing
the shutter button directly, you can shoot remotely (= 165) or
use an optional remote switch (= 186).
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● When [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable], shooting is started by
touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again. Be
careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.
Appendix
Index
101
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Choose from the three flash levels in [
1
][
][
Movies
] modes.
Specify the flash mode.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (= 31).
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Flash Mode], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Manual], and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Configure the setting.
zzRaise the flash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [
] dial to choose
the flash level, and then press the [ ]
button.
zzOnce the setting is complete, the flash
output level is displayed.
]: Minimum, [
]: Medium, [
]:
[
Maximum
●● You can also set the flash level by accessing MENU (= 31)
and choosing [ 5] tab > [Flash Control] > [Flash Output].
●● You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (= 31) as
follows.
-- Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.
-- When the flash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately
] button.
press the [
Still Images
Before Use
Basic Guide
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, exposure, aperture value, and ISO
speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
see “Shutter” (= 223), “Aperture” (= 223), and “Changing the ISO
Speed” (= 80).
1
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Enter [ ] mode.
Other Shooting Modes
zzHold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
P Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 30).
2
zzTurn the [
speed.
zzTurn the [
value.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Configure the settings.
] dial to set the shutter
Playback Mode
] dial to set the aperture
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Shoot.
zzPress the movie button.
Accessories
zzYou can also adjust settings while
recording, as described in step 2.
●● Some shutter speeds may cause flickering on the screen when
recording under fluorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
Appendix
Index
102
●● When the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], you can also adjust the
exposure before recording by turning the exposure compensation
dial.
●● When the ISO speed is fixed, an exposure level mark based on
your specified value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level
mark is shown as [ ] or [ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
●● You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing the
shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be obtained
with your specified shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO
speed is displayed in orange.
●● Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] (to
switch it to [ ]) and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Customizing Controls and Display
Customizing Display Information
Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [ ] button on the
shooting screen. You can also customize what information is displayed.
1
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Access the setting screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzOn the [ 1] tab, choose [Screen info/
toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] in [Shooting information display],
and then press the [ ] button (= 31).
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose any screen you prefer not
to display, and then press the [ ] button
to remove the [ ] mark. Pressing the
[ ] button again will add the [ ] mark,
which indicates that it is selected for
display.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
●● At least one option must be selected.
Appendix
Index
103
Customizing the Information Displayed
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing
Display Information” (= 103) to choose
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],
and then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose information to display, and
then press the [ ] button to add a [ ]
mark.
zzTo see an example of display, press the
] button to return to the [Screen
[
info/ toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] screen.
●● For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab > [Shooting
information display] > [Grid display].
●● The following settings are available by choosing [ 1] tab >
[Shooting information display] > [Histogram].
-- Switch from a brightness histogram to an RGB histogram.
-- Reduce the size of the histogram displayed.
Configuring Touch & Drag AF
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
With Touch & Drag AF, you can move the AF frame by touching or
dragging the screen while looking through the viewfinder.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the setting screen.
Camera Basics
zzChoose [Touch & drag AF settings] on the
[ 2] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(= 31).
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
Other Shooting Modes
zzChoose [Touch & drag AF], select
[Enable], and then press the [ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
● When you choose MENU (= 31) > [ 4] tab > [Touch Operation]
> [Disable], [Touch & drag AF] is set to [Disable] and cannot be
changed.
●● AF frames may not be displayed correctly if you switch to
viewfinder display while touching the screen. In this case, lift your
finger and touch the screen again.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
104
Changing the Settings of Touch and Drag Operations
zzChoose [Pos’n method] in step 1 of
“Configuring Touch & Drag AF” (= 104)
and choose the desired option.
Assigning Functions to Controls
Still Images
The AF frame moves to the touched or dragged position on
the screen.
Relative
The AF frame moves in the direction you drag, by an
amount corresponding to the amount you drag, no matter
where you touch the screen.
Restricting the Area of the Screen Available for Touch and
Drag Operations
zzFollow step 1 in “Configuring Touch &
Drag AF” (= 104) and choose [Active
touch area].
zzChoose the area that will be available for
this feature.
Movies
Reassign functions of the shutter button, [ ] button, [ ] ring, [
]
dial, or [ ] dial, or assign common functions to the movie button or [
button.
1
Absolute
Before Use
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the setting screen.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Function Assignment] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (= 31).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
2
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
][ ] dials to choose the dial or
button to assign, and then press the [
button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
]
Playback Mode
zzWhen assigning the shutter button, [ ]
button, [ ] ring, [
] dial, or [ ] dial,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the shooting mode or the
camera control, press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose the shooting mode or function,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzWhen assigning the movie button or [ ]
button, press the [ ] button, choose the
function on the screen displayed (either
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [
][ ] dials), and then press the
[ ] button.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
105
Shutter button or
[ ] button
[AF/AE lock]
Enable exposure lock by
pressing the [ ] button, after
focusing by pressing the
shutter button halfway.
[AE lock/AF]
Enable exposure lock by
pressing the shutter button
halfway, and focusing by
pressing the [ ] button.
[AF/AF lock,
no AE lock]
Enable focus lock by pressing
the [ ] button.
Enable exposure
compensation by pressing the
shutter button halfway, and
focusing by pressing the [ ]
button.
Enable configuration of the assigned function in
[
], [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode by turning
the [ ] ring, [
] dial, or [ ] dial.
[AE/AF, no
AE lock]
[ ] ring, [
or [ ] dial
Movie button
[
] button
] dial,
●● To restore the default settings to the movie button and [
]
].
button, choose [ ] and [
●● Icons labeled with a [ ] sign indicate that the function is not
available in the current shooting mode or under current function
conditions.
], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks
●● With [
] is displayed on the screen.
the focus, and [
●● With [ ], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen
display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
-- Operate any camera control other than the power button
-- Hold the camera in another orientation
-- Open or close the screen
-- Raise or lower the flash
●● You can still record movies in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even
if you assign a function to the movie button.
]
●● You can still choose the direction to move the camera in [
] button.
mode if you assign a function to the [
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Press the button to activate the assigned
function.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
106
Rearranging Menu Items
Customizing the Quick Set Menu
Still Images
Movies
The display of Quick Set menu items can be customized.
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Quick
setting menu layout] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (= 31).
2
1
Choose icons to include in the
menu.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an icon, and then press
the [ ] button to label icons you want to
display in the Quick Set menu with [ ].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an icon to move, and then
press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the new position, and then
press the [ ] button.
2
zzSelected items (labeled with a [
be included in display.
Access the setting screen.
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (= 107),
press the [ ] button.
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
1
Before Use
Other Shooting Modes
Configure the setting.
P Mode
zzPress the [
] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
]) will
Setting Menu
zzItems without a [ ] can be configured on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
3
Accessories
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
●● Up to 11 items can be displayed in the menu.
●● The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[ ] button when the Quick Set menu is displayed.
107
3
Saving Shooting Settings
Still Images
Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ] or [
]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you
switch shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings)
can be retained this way.
Settings That Can Be Saved
●● Shooting modes ([ ], [
●● Items set in [ ], [
], [
], [
], and [
], and [
])
] modes (= 78 – = 100)
●● Shooting menu settings
Save the settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Register settings], and
then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a custom shooting mode to
assign, and then press the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK] after the confirmation
message, and then press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [
]
], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These
or [
setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.
Other Shooting Modes
●● To reset saved settings to their defaults, choose [Clear settings]
on the screen in step 3, press the [ ] button, and then choose
the custom shooting mode. On the confirmation screen displayed
next, choose [OK] and press the [ ] button.
●● To automatically update your saved settings with any changes to
] or [
] mode, set
settings that you make while shooting in [
[Auto update set.] to [Enable] on the screen in step 3.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
P Mode
●● Zoom positions
●● Manual focus positions (= 89)
●● My Menu settings (= 109)
1
2
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)] on the
[ 5] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
108
3
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [ 1]
tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access these items quickly
from a single screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Add
My Menu tab] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 31).
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzChoose [Set up MYMENU1] on the [
tab, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Sort registered items], and
then press the [ ] button.
zzChoose a menu item to move (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
zzPress the [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
P Mode
1]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● You can add up to [ 5] by repeating this process from step 1.
●● Choosing [Delete all items on tab] on the screen in step 2 will
delete all items added to the tab.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Configure the setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select item to register],
and then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item to save (max.
six items) and then press the [ ] button
to save it.
zz[
] is displayed.
zzTo cancel saving, press the [
[ ] is no longer displayed.
zzPress the [
●● On the [Select item to register] screen for saving or clearing
items, you can also touch items to select them.
●● On the [Sort registered items] screen, you can also drag items to
change the display order.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
] button.
] button.
109
Renaming My Menu Tabs
1
Deleting All My Menu Tabs or Items
1
Choose [Rename tab].
zzFollowing steps 2 – 3 in “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (= 109), choose [Rename
tab] and press the [ ] button.
2
Basic Guide
Choose an item.
zzOn the screen in step 1 of “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (= 109), choose [Delete all
My Menu tabs] or [Delete all items], and
then press the [ ] button.
Change the tab name.
2
zzUse the keyboard displayed to enter the
new tab name (= 32).
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Delete the item.
zzChoosing [Delete all My Menu tabs] will
delete all My Menu tabs and restore the
default [ ] tab.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
Deleting a My Menu Tab
Before Use
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzChoosing [Delete all items] will delete all
items added to tabs [ 1] to [ 5].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Customizing My Menu Tab Display
1
Choose [Delete tab].
zzFollowing steps 2 – 3 in “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (= 109), choose [Delete
tab] and press the [ ] button.
2
Specify which screen is displayed when the [
Shooting mode.
zzOn the screen in step 1 of “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (= 109), choose [Menu
display], and then choose an item as
desired.
Delete the item.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Playback Mode
] button is pressed in
Normal display
Display the most recent menu, as
shown for your previous operation.
Display from My Menu tab
Start display from [
] tab screens.
Display only My Menu tab
Restrict display to [
] tab screens.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
110
Playback
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Advanced Guide
Enter Playback mode.
zzPress the [
Camera Basics
] button.
zzYour last shot is displayed.
Playback Mode
2
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
●● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
button to enter Playback mode.
Basic Guide
]
●● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose images.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
zzTo access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzTo return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
zzTo browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
zzMovies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
Appendix
Index
] icon.
111
3
Play movies.
zzTo start playback, press the [ ] button to
access the movie control panel, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button again.
4
][
zzTo view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
] buttons to adjust the
zzTo adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons.
5
Before Use
Adjust the volume.
zzPress the [
volume.
(1)
Touch-Screen Operations
Pause playback.
zzTo pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
zzAfter the movie is finished, [
displayed.
] is
●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
●● White lines indicating the aspect ratio are displayed when you
view RAW images. These lines are shown on the top and bottom
] and on the left and right
of images shot at an aspect ratio of [
] or [
].
of images shot at an aspect ratio of [
5]
●● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (= 31) > [
tab > [Scroll Display] > [Off].
●● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
5] tab > [Resume] > [Last
mode, choose MENU (= 31) > [
shot].
●● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
5] tab >
(= 31) and choose your desired effect on the [
[Transition Effect].
zzTo access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzYou can also browse through images in
Scroll Display mode by dragging left or
right.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTouching the central image will restore
single-image display.
P Mode
zzTo browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, quickly drag
up or down.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo start movie playback, touch [
2 of “Playback” (= 111).
Playback Mode
] in step
Wireless Features
zzTo adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
Setting Menu
zzTo stop playback, touch the screen. The
screen shown at left is displayed, and the
following operations are available.
zzTouch [ ] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the
volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzTo switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
zzTo resume playback, touch [ ].
] to return to the screen in
zzTouch [
step 2 of “Playback” (= 111).
112
Switching Display Modes
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button in Playback mode to switch from no information
display to Info display 1 (basic info) and then to Info display 2 – 5 (details).
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will deactivate
the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the camera body) to
deactivate it and activate the viewfinder (= 21).
●● Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed
Customize the information shown on each screen. For details on the
information available, see “During Playback” (= 205).
1
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Playback information display] on the
[
6] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose information to display.
zzChoose information to display, and then
press the [ ] button to add a [ ] mark.
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
●● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
information display (= 113).
Advanced Guide
Histogram
Still Images
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Movies
zzInformation displays 2 – 5 include a graph
on the top called a histogram, which
shows the distribution of brightness in
images. The horizontal axis represents
the degree of brightness, and the vertical
axis, how much of the image is at each
level of brightness. Viewing the histogram
is a way to check exposure.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Still Images
Playback Mode
Movies
zzInformation display 3 includes an RGB
histogram, showing the distribution
of reds, greens, and blues in images.
The horizontal axis represents R, G,
or B brightness, and the vertical axis,
how much of the image is at that level
of brightness. Viewing this histogram
enables you to check image color
characteristics.
zzStill images and movies you shoot can be
geotagged using GPS information (such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation)
from a Bluetooth enabled smartphone
(= 164). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
zzLatitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
113
●● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
●● An RGB histogram can also be shown at the top of information
displays 2 – 5. Choose one of the information display options from
2 to 5 in [Playback information display] on tab [ 6], press the
] button, choose [RGB], and then press the [ ] button. Note
[
that information display 3 will show a brightness histogram on the
bottom of the screen.
●● The brightness histogram can also be accessed while shooting
(= 104, = 204).
●● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
●● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
View digest movies recorded automatically in [
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Before Use
Movies
] mode (= 37) on a
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose an image.
Camera Basics
zzStill images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with [
] icon.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzChoose a still image labeled with
] and press the [ ] button.
[
2
Other Shooting Modes
Play the digest movie.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [
and then press the [ ] button.
P Mode
],
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
●● You can also switch between the RGB histogram and GPS
information display by dragging the lower half of the screen
upward or downward in detailed information display.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● After a moment, [
] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(= 113).
Setting Menu
Accessories
Viewing by Date
Appendix
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [
2] tab,
and then touch a date (= 31).
Index
114
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Browsing and Filtering Images
Before Use
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (= 113),
the names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID (= 45)
will be displayed.
zzPress the [ ] button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image.
zzNames will be displayed on detected
people.
●● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
3] tab > [Face ID Info] >
Face ID, choose MENU (= 31) > [
[Name Display] > [Off].
Basic Guide
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
Advanced Guide
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images
you are looking for.
1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display images in an index.
zzMove the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzTo display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Choose an image.
zzTurn the [
images.
zzPress the [
an image.
Playback Mode
] dial to scroll through the
][
Wireless Features
][ ][ ] buttons to choose
Setting Menu
zzAn orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
●● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
5] tab > [Index Effect] > [Off].
(= 31) > [
Appendix
Index
115
1
Touch-Screen Operations
zzPinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
zzTo view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
zzDrag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
zzTo view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your fingers apart.
zzTouch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect
(= 121) or delete (= 123) these images all at once.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (= 126).
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specific date.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[ ] mode (= 37).
Name
Displays images of a registered person (= 45).
Choose the first condition.
zzIn single-image display, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
choose a condition.
zzWhen [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
of these images together, press the [ ]
button and go to step 3.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose the second condition and
view the filtered images.
Other Shooting Modes
zzWhen you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the first condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo switch to filtered image display, press
the [ ] button and go to step 3.
Playback Mode
zzWhen you have selected [ ] as the first
condition, press the [ ] button, and
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the
next screen to choose a person.
3
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
View the filtered images.
zzImages matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
zzTo cancel filtered display, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
then press the [ ] button again.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
116
●● To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 3.
●● Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 115), “Magnifying
Images” (= 120), and “Viewing Slideshows” (= 121). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (= 121) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(= 124), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 194), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 197).
●● If you edit images and save them as new images (= 128 –
= 135), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
●● You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps
1 and 2.
●● After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
Still Images
1
Choose a condition.
zzChoose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the [
]
dial and immediately pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
View images matching your
specified condition, or jump by the
specified amount.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTurn the [
] dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specified number of images forward or
back.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzYou can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Front Dial
to Jump between Images” (= 117) by
dragging left or right with two fingers.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Movies
Setting Menu
Use the front dial to find and jump between desired images quickly by
filtering image display according to your specified conditions.
Jump to Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (= 126).
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the first image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Single image
Jumps by 1 image at a time.
Jump 10 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
117
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Individual still images saved in [ ] mode (= 68) are grouped, so
that only the first image is displayed, but you can also view the images
individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image labeled with
[
].
2
Choose [
●● During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 115) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (= 120). You can apply your
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All
Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (= 121), [All Images in
Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 124), [Select All
in Group] in “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 194),
or [Select All Images] in “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(= 197).
●● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
5] tab > [Group Images]
images, choose MENU (= 31) > [
> [Off] (= 31). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped
during individual playback.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
].
P Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 30).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
3
View images in the group
individually.
Wireless Features
zzPressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial will display only images in the
group.
zzTo cancel group playback, press the [
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (= 30).
Setting Menu
Accessories
]
Appendix
Index
118
4
Editing Face ID Information
zzFollow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (= 48) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the setting screen.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [
] button and choose
3] tab (= 31).
[Face ID Info] on the [
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Before Use
●● You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
] to display the
image on the screen in step 2, touching [
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
●● You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Changing Names
1
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
Erasing Names
]
Choose an image.
zzFollowing the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (= 115),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
P Mode
zzOn the screen displayed in step 3 in
“Changing Names” (= 119), choose
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
zzAn orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Choose the editing option.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
119
Touch-Screen Operations
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
1
Movies
Magnify an image.
zzMoving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
Before Use
zzSpread your fingers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
Basic Guide
zzYou can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
Advanced Guide
zzTo move the display position, drag across
the screen.
Camera Basics
zzPinch in to zoom out.
zzTouch [
display.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] to restore single-image
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
zzTo zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [ ]. You can return to singleimage display by continuing to hold it.
(1)
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
zzTo move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
P Mode
Double-Touch Magnification
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzQuickly touch the screen twice to magnify
the image about 3x.
Playback Mode
zzTo return to single-image display from
magnified display, quickly touch the
screen twice.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
zzTo switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [ ] dial.
Accessories
●● You can return to single-image display from magnified display by
] button.
pressing the [
] is displayed by pressing
●● You can check the focus when [
the [ ] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check).
When multiple positions are in focus, press the [ ] button
repeatedly to switch to other positions.
Appendix
Index
120
Viewing Slideshows
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
zzPress the [
] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [
1] tab
(= 31).
Still Images
zzPress the [
slideshow.
] button to stop the
●● The camera’s power-saving functions (= 27) are deactivated
during slideshows.
Movies
Basic Guide
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (= 123).
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [
] in
the menu, and then choose [
] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial). [ ] is displayed.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzThe slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
Before Use
zzTo cancel protection, choose [OFF]. [
is no longer displayed.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (= 171).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection.
Playback Mode
●● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
●● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fastrewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down.
●● You can configure slideshow repetition, display time per image,
and the transition between images on the screen accessed by
choosing [Set up] and pressing the [ ] button (= 31).
Using the Menu
Wireless Features
1
Access the setting screen.
Setting Menu
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[Protect] on the [
1] tab (= 31).
Accessories
Appendix
●● You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
2
Choose a selection method.
Index
zzChoose an option as desired (= 31).
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
121
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (= 121), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Selecting a Range
Before Use
1
Choose [Select Range].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (= 121), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choose a starting image.
zzPress the [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Protect the image.
zzPress the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Playback Mode
3
Choose an ending image.
Wireless Features
zzPress the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
●● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.
●● You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the confirmation screen by touching
].
[
●● You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
zzImages before the first image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Appendix
Index
122
4
Protect the images.
zzPress the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
Erasing Images
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (= 121) cannot be erased.
●● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
●● You can also display the screen for choosing the first or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
●● You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (= 121), choose [Protect All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
1
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choose an image to erase.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
2
Basic Guide
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Erase the image.
zzPress the [
Other Shooting Modes
] button.
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe current image is now erased.
Playback Mode
zzTo cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, pressing the
[ ] button while the image is displayed gives you the option of
], or [Erase
].
choosing [Erase ], [Erase
●● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
●● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (= 127).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
123
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (= 121) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [
1] tab
(= 31).
2
Choose a selection method.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 124), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choose an image.
zzOnce you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(= 122), [ ] is displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
P Mode
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Erase the images.
zzPress the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Playback Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will
erase both versions.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
124
Selecting a Range
Rotating Images
1
Choose [Select Range].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 124), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Advanced Guide
Choose [ ].
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 30).
Choose images.
Camera Basics
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 122) to specify images.
3
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Erase the images.
2
zzPress the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 124), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Erase the images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
Rotate the image.
zzPress the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(= 126).
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Using the Menu
1
Accessories
Choose [Rotate].
zzPress the [
[Rotate] on the [
] button and choose
1] tab (= 31).
Appendix
Index
125
2
Rotate the image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
zzThe image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [ ] button.
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
●● On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [
] to rotate
] to return to the menu screen.
images or touch [
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● “Playback” (= 111), “Viewing Slideshows” (= 121), “Protecting
Images” (= 121), “Erasing Images” (= 123), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (= 194), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(= 197)
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 30).
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [OFF], and then press the
[ ] button.
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Using the Menu
1
●● Images cannot be rotated (= 125) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [
5] tab, and then
choose [Off] (= 31).
Before Use
Wireless Features
Choose [Favorites].
Setting Menu
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [
1] tab (= 31).
Accessories
2
Appendix
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
Index
zzTo untag the image, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
126
3
Finish the setup process.
zzPress the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in
step 3.
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using Touch Actions Functions
Camera Basics
zzDrag across the screen as shown.
zzThe function assigned to [
activated.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] is now
Other Shooting Modes
●● Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
creating albums (= 136).
●● You can also select or clear current images by touching the
screen in step 2.
●● Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
(= 127).
P Mode
zzSimilarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [ ], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzCustomize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Setting Menu
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
1
Accessories
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [
tab (= 31).
Appendix
6]
Index
127
2
Assign a function to a Touch Action.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a function to assign.
]
Assignable Functions
Slideshow
Start a slideshow.
Erase
Erase an image.
Protect
Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate
Rotate an image.
Favorites
Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
Next Favorite
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as a
favorite.
Previous Favorite
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged as
a favorite.
Next Date
Switch to displaying the first image with the next
shooting date.
Previous Date
Switch to displaying the first image with the previous
shooting date.
To Camera
To Smartphone
To Computer
To Printer
To Web Service
Editing Still Images
Basic Guide
●● Image editing (= 128 – = 131) is only available when the
memory card has sufficient free space.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● You can access editing screens for various functions by touching
an image after choosing the function in the menu.
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
●● When [
] instead of pressing the [
] button, if you prefer.
[
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
●● When [
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
[
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Resizing Images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Still Images
Movies
Playback Mode
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1
Choose an image size.
Wireless Features
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose an image size
(= 30).
zzPress the [
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wireless Features” (= 141).
Before Use
2
Setting Menu
] button.
Accessories
Save the new image.
zzAfter [Save new image?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Appendix
Index
zzThe image is now saved as a new file.
128
3
4
Review the new image.
] button and follow step
zzPress the [
3 in “Resizing Images” (= 128).
zzThe saved image is now displayed.
●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [ ].
●● RAW images cannot be edited.
●● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
●● You can also view saved images by touching [Processed img.] on
the screen in step 3.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Resize].
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[Resize] on the [
3] tab (= 31).
2
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Save as a new image and review.
zzFollow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(= 128).
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Processed img.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Cropping
Camera Basics
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.
1
Access the setting screen.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
(= 30).
2
P Mode
Resize, move, and adjust the aspect
ratio of the cropping frame.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
Playback Mode
zzTo move the frame, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Wireless Features
zzTo change the frame orientation, turn the
[ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
zzTo change the frame aspect ratio, turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ]. To switch
between aspect ratios ([ ], [
],
[ ], and [ ]), press the [ ] button
repeatedly.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Choose an image size.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
129
3
Preview the cropped image.
zzTurn the [
] dial to choose [
].
zzTo switch display between the cropped
image and the cropping frame, press the
[ ] button repeatedly.
4
Save as a new image and review.
zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(= 128).
●● RAW images cannot be edited.
●● Cropped images cannot be cropped again.
●● Cropped images cannot be resized or have Creative filters
applied.
●● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
●● While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,
move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
]
●● Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [
3] tab > [Cropping], pressing the [ ]
button, choosing [
button, choosing an image, and pressing the [ ] button again.
●● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (= 45), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
●● You can also move the cropping frame in step 2 by dragging it.
You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (= 120) on the
screen.
], and
●● Operations are also possible by touching [ ], [ ], [
[ ] on the top of the screen in step 2.
Applying Filter Effects
Before Use
Apply effects equivalent to shooting in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
[ ] modes to images and save them as separate images.
1
], [
], and
Choose an effect.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose the effect
(= 30).
zzPress the [
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
Adjust the effect as needed.
Other Shooting Modes
zz[ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
contrast.
P Mode
zz[ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
defocusing.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zz[ ] or [ ]: Touch or drag the bar on the
bottom of the screen to adjust the level of
the effect.
Playback Mode
zz[ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
color saturation.
Wireless Features
]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
zz[
color tone.
Setting Menu
zz[ ]: Move the zoom lever to resize the
frame, and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
Accessories
3
Save as a new image and review.
zzPress the [
Appendix
] button.
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(= 128).
Index
130
4
●● The same operations are available by pressing the [
]
button and choosing [ 2] tab > [Creative filters], choosing an
image, and pressing the [ ] button.
●● [ ]: To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press
the [ ][ ] buttons on the screen in step 2. To move the frame,
press the [ ][ ] buttons again. To return the frame to horizontal
orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
zzThe image is now saved as a new file.
] button and follow step
zzPress the [
3 in “Resizing Images” (= 128).
●● You can also adjust the effect by touching or dragging the bar on
the bottom of the screen in step 2. For [ ], you can also move
the frame by touching or dragging across the screen.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
●● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
●● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
●● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
●● Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured
in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate file.
1
Save as a new image and review.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● You can also save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite]
on the screen in step 4.
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
zzPress the [
] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the
[
3] tab (= 31).
2
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
3
Setting Menu
Accessories
]
Correct the image.
zzPress the [
] button.
Appendix
Index
zzRed-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
zzEnlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(= 120).
131
5
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
Still Images
Movies
Process images captured in RAW format on the camera. The original
RAW image is retained, and a copy is saved as a JPEG.
1
Choose a RAW image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a RAW image.
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the setting screen.
zzWhen choosing [
], go to step 5.
Set the processing conditions.
zzIf you have chosen [ ], press the [ ]
button, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to choose an option, and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Before Use
zzIf you have chosen [ ], press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
]
zzPress the [ ] button, and choose [ ]
in the menu. Choose the desired option
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial).
3
Save the image.
zzIf you have chosen [ ], press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ].
Press the [ ] button, choose [OK] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button
again.
Other Shooting Modes
Brightness adjustment
Adjust brightness.
White balance
Choose a white balance.
Picture Style
Choose a Picture Style.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Auto Lighting Optimizer Set Auto Lighting Optimizer details.
High ISO speed NR
Set noise reduction details.
Image quality
Set the image quality level of the resulting
JPEG image.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Configure advanced settings.
zzChoose an effect (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button to return to the
screen in step 3.
●● You can also choose an effect for a selected processing condition
on the screen in step 3 by turning the [ ] dial.
●● For magnified display on the screen in step 3, move the zoom
lever toward [ ].
●● To restore the original settings, on the screen in step 3, press the
] button, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
[
the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
●● You can configure advanced settings for functions labeled with
] on the screen in step 4 by pressing the [ ] button.
[
●● To compare the current image to the original image before saving
in step 5, press the [ ] button and turn the [ ] dial. To return to
] button.
the setting screen, press the [
Accessories
Appendix
Index
132
Using the Menu
Selecting a Range
1
Access the setting screen.
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[RAW img processing] on the [
3] tab
(= 31).
2
Choose a selection method.
zzChoose an option as desired (= 31).
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (= 133), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Before Use
1
Choose [Select Range].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (= 133), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choose images.
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 122) to specify images.
3
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Process the images.
Other Shooting Modes
zzFollow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images with the Camera” (= 132) to
process the images.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Images produced by in-camera processing will not match those
processed with Digital Photo Professional exactly.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● Up to 500 images can be selected at one time.
Choose an image.
Setting Menu
zzOnce you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(= 122), [ ] is displayed.
Accessories
zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
zzPress the [
next screen.
3
Appendix
Index
] button to go to the
Process the image.
zzFollow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images with the Camera” (= 132) to
process the image.
133
3
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of
movies.
1
zzTo edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
]
zzTo cancel editing, press the [
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Choose [ ].
zzFollowing steps 1 – 5 in “Playback”
(= 111), choose [ ] and press the [
button.
]
zzThe movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
(1)
2
Specify portions to cut.
zz(1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
zzPress the [
or [ ].
(2)
][
] buttons to choose [
Review the edited movie.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button. The
edited movie is now played.
]
zzTo specify a portion to cut (indicated by
[ ]), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to move the orange [ ] or
[ ] icon. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
zzIf you move [ ] or [ ] to a position other
than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion
before the nearest [ ] mark on the left
will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after
the nearest [ ] mark on the right will be
cut.
4
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Save the edited movie.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzChoose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
zzThe movie is now saved as a new file.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
●● If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
●● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
●● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery
pack.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or
editing bar.
134
Reducing File Sizes
Erasing Movie Chapters
Still Images
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
zzChoose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Image Quality of Compressed Movies
Before Compression
After Compression
,
Before Use
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (= 37) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
1
2
●● [
] and [
] movies cannot be compressed.
●● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
] or [
] reduces the file
●● Compressing movies to [
size while maintaining the same image quality.
Advanced Guide
Select the clip to erase.
Camera Basics
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (= 114) to
play a short movie, and then press the
[ ] button to access the movie control
panel.
zzTo choose the clip, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [
or [ ], and then press the [ ] button.
,
Basic Guide
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Choose [ ].
Playback Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
Wireless Features
zzThe selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Setting Menu
Confirm erasure.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzThe clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
Appendix
Index
●● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
135
1
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
Still Images
Choose an image.
Before Use
zzChoose an image in single-image display.
Movies
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Choosing Themes for Albums
Press the [ ] button and choose the Story Highlights icon. The home
screen is displayed, and you can choose the theme for the camera to use
when selecting album elements. Note that the camera is more likely to
add images tagged as favorites (= 126) to albums.
Date
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as the
image displayed before you access the home screen.
Person’s
name
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject shot
during the same month as the image displayed before you
access the home screen.
Event
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event before
and after the image displayed before you access the home
screen.
Custom
Includes images based on your specified images, dates, or
people registered in Face ID.
zzThemes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the home screen.
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
then press the [ ] button (= 30).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzAfter [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
3
Other Shooting Modes
Preview an album.
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
person or [Date] or [Event] as the album
theme, and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzAfter [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
4
Playback Mode
Save the album.
Wireless Features
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save Album as Movie], and then press
the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
zzOnce the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
Accessories
5
Appendix
Play the album (= 111).
Index
136
●● Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
-- Still images
-- Digest movies (= 37), except compressed movies
-- Short movie clips with a playback time of two seconds or more
(= 74), except compressed movies
Adding Background Music to Albums
Still Images
Movies
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album
playback.
1
●● Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
●● You can also access the Story Highlights home screen by
Story Highlights].
choosing MENU (= 31) > [ 2] tab > [
●● To jump to the next chapter during the preview, drag left, and to
jump to the previous chapter, drag right.
●● You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Effect] and pressing the [ ] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [ ] button.
●● To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [ ] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [ ] button again.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Register background music to a
memory card.
Camera Basics
zzFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (= 136), choose
[Music Settings] and press the [ ]
button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe screen at left is displayed when
you use a new or recently formatted
memory card. Choose [OK] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
press the [ ] button, and wait about four
minutes until the seven types of music
are registered to the card.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzWhen using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
2
Wireless Features
Create the album.
Setting Menu
zzFollow steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (= 136) to create an
album.
3
Accessories
Configure background music
settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the desired item, press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an
option (= 31).
Appendix
Index
137
4
3
Save the album.
zzFollow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (= 136) to save albums.
●● Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or
changed.
●● Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(= 135).
●● If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
●● To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
●● To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [ ]
button.
Still Images
Movies
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
1
Choose to create a Custom album.
zzFollowing steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (= 136), choose
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
2
] button after you
zzPress the [
are finished selecting still images or
short clips in [Image Selection], dates in
[Date Selection], or people in [Person
Selection].
Choose a selection method.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Other Shooting Modes
Choose background music.
P Mode
zzWhen the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
music as described in “Adding
Background Music to Albums” (= 137),
and then press the [
] button.
5
Creating Your Own Albums
Choose album elements.
zzOnce you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Choose a color effect.
Wireless Features
zzOn the screen in step 4, choose [Change
Color Effect].
Setting Menu
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
color effect, and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Accessories
Save the album.
zzFollow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (= 136) to save albums.
Appendix
Index
zzChoose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
138
●● You can specify up to 40 files (or 10 movie files) after choosing
[Image Selection]. The second time you create a custom album,
[Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed. To
use previously selected images as the basis, choose [Yes]. The
previous stills or clips are labeled with [ ], and multiple images
are displayed.
●● Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
●● The color effect may not be applied to some images.
Combining Short Clips
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights
albums (= 136).
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Access the editing screen.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Short
Clip Mix] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Merge
Clips] (= 31).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
2
P Mode
Specify clips to combine.
zzDrag clips on the top of the screen left or
right, choose a clip to combine, and press
the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzYour selected clip is displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
zzTo cancel selection, press the [
again.
Playback Mode
] button
Wireless Features
zzRepeat these steps to specify other clips
to combine.
Setting Menu
zzAfter you are finished selecting clips,
] button.
press the [
Accessories
3
Preview the movie.
zzChoose [Preview] and press the [
button.
Appendix
]
Index
zzAfter [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the combined clips
is played.
139
4
Save the movie.
zzChoose [Save], and then press the [
button.
Before Use
]
zzOnce the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Play the movie.
Camera Basics
zzChoose [Play Back
Movie] on the
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies
you have created.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzChoose the movie to play and press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
●● The next time you combine short clips, [Select images based
on previous settings?] is displayed, and you can choose [Yes]
to display the editing screen with clips arranged in the order you
selected them last time.
] on the
●● To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [
screen in step 2.
●● To rearrange clips, press the [ ] button on the screen in step 2,
select a clip, press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button again.
●● To apply a color effect, choose [Change Color Effect] on the
screen in step 3.
●● To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen
in step 3 (= 137).
●● The image quality of movies saved is [ ].
●● Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
140
Available Wireless Features
Using Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
Wireless Features
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
●● Before using wireless features, be sure to read “Precautions for
Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or Others)” (= 229).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have WiFi functions. Remote live view shooting is also possible from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this guide, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Computers
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photo service or other Web services to send camera
images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can also be
sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● Printers
Print images wirelessly on a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP).
Setting Menu
●● Other Cameras
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Accessories
Using Bluetooth® Features
Appendix
You can easily pair the camera with a smartphone featuring Bluetooth low
energy technology*. You can also shoot, view, or geotag images by using
your smartphone as a remote control.
Index
* Hereafter referred to as “Bluetooth”.
141
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
●● Connect via Bluetooth
You can easily connect the camera to a Bluetooth enabled smartphone
by pairing them. This simplifies transferring images to a smartphone.
●● Connect via NFC (= 144)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone against the
camera to connect the devices.
●● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (= 146)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
●● Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow
to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should
consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.
Sending Images to a Bluetooth Enabled
Smartphone
Once you have paired with a smartphone via Bluetooth, simply operate
your smartphone to view and save camera images.
1
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Install Camera Connect.
Camera Basics
zzFor Android smartphones, find Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzFor an iPhone or iPad, find Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Register a nickname.
zzPress the power button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Nickname].
Playback Mode
zzPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (= 32), and then enter a
nickname.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
zzTo return to [Wireless settings] after
] button, press the
pressing the [
[
] button again.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
142
3
Prepare for pairing.
zzChoose [Bluetooth settings], press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Pairing], and then press the [ ]
button.
zzA screen is displayed indicating that the
camera is waiting to connect.
7
Transfer images.
zzThe camera will automatically switch to
Wi-Fi if you choose [Images on camera]
in Camera Connect.
zzOn an iPhone or iPad, in the device’s
Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID
(network name) displayed on the camera
to establish a connection.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzUse the smartphone to transfer images
from the camera to the smartphone.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzTo switch to Bluetooth, disable the Wi-Fi
connection on the smartphone.
4
Start Camera Connect.
zzActivate Bluetooth on the smartphone,
and then start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
zzAfter the camera is recognized, a camera
selection screen is displayed.
5
Select the camera to connect to.
zzChoose the camera nickname.
zzComplete the pairing process for the
smartphone.
6
Complete pairing.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK] after the confirmation
message on the camera, and then press
the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Battery life may be shorter when you use the camera after pairing,
because power is consumed even when the camera is off.
●● Before bringing the camera to places where the use of electronic
devices is restricted, set [Bluetooth] to [Off], to avoid having the
camera ready for Bluetooth communication even when it is off.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Bluetooth connection status is indicated by one of the following
icons.
[ ] Connected, [ ] Disconnected
●● You can also use the camera to disable Wi-Fi connection
described in step 7.
●● To check the information of the smartphone connected via
Bluetooth in [Check/clear connection info], choose MENU
(= 31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth settings].
Choose [Address check] to check the camera’s Bluetooth
address.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ] button when the screen at
left is displayed.
143
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Use an Android smartphone’s NFC to simplify the process of installing
Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
●● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also use your
smartphone for remote live view shooting (= 164). It’s easy to
reconnect to recent devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
●● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode
1
Install Camera Connect.
zzRefer to the smartphone user manual to
check where the N-Mark ( ) is located.
zzActivate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices’ N-Marks ( ) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
2
Establish the connection.
zzMake sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
zzTouch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzThe camera screen automatically
changes.
Camera Basics
zzIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzCamera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzThe devices are connected automatically.
Playback Mode
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
Wireless Features
zzWhen this screen is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzYou can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse or
transfer images on the camera.
Appendix
Index
144
4
Send an image.
zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
zz[Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
zzTo end the connection, press the
] button, choose [OK] on the
[
confirmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
●● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
-- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
-- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
-- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
-- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
●● Privacy settings for registered smartphones can be changed later,
as needed (= 167).
●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (= 32).
●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (= 160).
●● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (= 31) > [ 4] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [NFC] > [Off].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Connecting via NFC in Playback Mode
zzPress the [
on.
] button to turn the camera
Other Shooting Modes
zzTouch the smartphone with Camera
Connect installed (= 144) against the
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
Playback Mode
zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Wireless Features
zzRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
Setting Menu
zzAfter you finish choosing images, press
] button, choose [OK], and
the [
then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
zzThe images are now sent.
zzTo end the connection, press the
] button, and then press the
[
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK].
Appendix
Index
145
●● If during connection a message on the camera requests you
to enter the nickname, enter it as described in “On-Screen
Keyboard” (= 32).
●● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
●● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (= 162).
Connecting to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi
Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (= 147).
1
Install Camera Connect.
zzFor Android smartphones, find Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
zzFor an iPhone or iPad, find Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [ ].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzThe camera SSID and password are
displayed.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
5
Other Shooting Modes
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
P Mode
zzIn the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzIn the password field, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
6
Wireless Features
Start Camera Connect.
Setting Menu
zzStart Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
7
Accessories
Select the camera to connect to.
zzOn the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
Appendix
Index
146
8
Adjust the privacy setting.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzYou can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse or
transfer images on the camera.
9
Send an image.
zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
zz[Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
zzTo end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 8. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 8.
●● Privacy settings for registered smartphones can be changed later,
as needed (= 167).
●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
●● To connect without entering a password in step 5, choose MENU
(= 31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Password] > [Off]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID
screen (in step 4).
●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (= 160).
●● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(= 127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Using Another Access Point
Setting Menu
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,
you can also use an existing access point.
1
zzAccess the [Waiting to connect] screen
by following steps 1 – 4 in “Connecting
to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu”
(= 146).
2
Accessories
Prepare for the connection.
Appendix
Index
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
147
3
Choose [Switch Network].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzA list of detected access points is
displayed.
4
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
zzFor WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (= 151).
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Connecting to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu”
(= 146).
●● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (= 147) from step 4.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzFor non-WPS access points, follow steps
2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (= 153) to connect to the
access point.
5
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Select the camera to connect to.
Playback Mode
zzOn the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
6
Wireless Features
Configure the privacy settings and
send images.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzFollow steps 8 – 9 in “Connecting to
a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu”
(= 146) to configure the privacy
settings and send images.
Appendix
Index
148
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
For details on computers that you can connect the camera to via WiFi, system requirements, and other compatibility information (including
support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
●● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
●● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
Download the software.
zzVisit the following site from a computer
connected to the Internet.
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
Other Shooting Modes
zzFor instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Installing CameraWindow
1
●● To uninstall (remove) the software in Windows, select [Start]
menu > [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities], and then choose the
software for uninstallation.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Configure the setting.
Playback Mode
zzClick in the following order: [Start] menu
> [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities] >
[CameraWindow] > [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
Wireless Features
zzIn the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
setting.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzChoose your country or region, and
then follow the instructions displayed to
prepare for downloading.
2
Follow the instructions displayed.
Appendix
Index
zzDouble-click the downloaded file to install
it.
●● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
149
●● The following Windows settings are configured when you run the
utility in step 2.
-- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
-- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.
-- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
-- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
●● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Interface” (= 225).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, = 151) or not (= 153). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
●● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
●● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
●● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
●● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
●● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
●● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
●● If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (= 31)
> [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC
Address].
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
150
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration (PBC) Method or PIN
Method to set up an access point that supports WPS.
1
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
zzFor instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [
].
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
5
Choose [Connect with WPS].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Connect with WPS], and
then press the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Choose [WPS (PBC mode)].
Camera Basics
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS (PBC mode)], and
then press the [ ] button.
7
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Establish the connection.
P Mode
zzOn the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
zzOn the camera, press the [
go to the next step.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] button to
Playback Mode
zzThe camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Choose the target device.
zzChoose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
151
9
Install a driver (first Windows
connection only).
zzWhen this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
zzDouble-click the connected camera icon.
zzDriver installation will begin.
zzAfter driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
10
Display CameraWindow.
zzWindows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
11
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
●● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (= 168).
●● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
●● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
●● The PIN code displayed when you choose [WPS (PIN mode)]
in step 6 is to be set in the access point. Choose a device in the
[Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user
manual included with your access point.
●● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(= 127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Import images.
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
Accessories
zzImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Appendix
zzClick [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
Index
zzTo view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
152
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
zzView the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(= 151).
2
Choose an access point.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
●● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
●● If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
●● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Previous Access Points
3
Enter the access point password.
zzPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(= 32).
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzTo save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(= 151).
P Mode
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 151).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● To connect to a device via an access point, confirm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(= 151).
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 151)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(= 153) from step 2.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
153
Sending Images to a Registered Web
Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add your Web services to the camera.
●● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
●● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
●● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
●● To use Web services other than CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you must
have an account with them. For further details, check the websites for
each Web service you want to register.
●● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may apply.
●● CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for
downloading.
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note
that you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone to receive a notification message for completing linkage
settings.
1
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
zzIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
2
Choose [
Playback Mode
].
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Accept the agreement to enter an
email address.
zzRead the agreement displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [I Agree], and then press the [ ]
button.
Appendix
Index
154
4
Establish a connection with an
access point.
zzConnect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (= 151) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(= 153).
5
Enter your email address.
zzOnce the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an email
address.
zzEnter your email address, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Next], and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Enter a four-digit number.
zzEnter a four-digit number of your choice,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzYou will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
7
Check for the notification message.
zzOnce information has been sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will
receive a notification message at the
email address entered in step 5.
zzPress the [ ] button on the next screen,
which indicates that notification has been
sent.
zz[
8
] now changes to [
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Access the page in the notification
message and complete camera link
settings.
P Mode
zzFrom a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notification
message.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzFollow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera link settings page.
9
Wireless Features
Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
settings on the camera.
Setting Menu
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
], and then
press the [ ] button.
zz[ ] (= 162) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
zzYou can add other Web services,
as needed. In this case, follow the
instructions from step 2 in “Registering
Other Web Services” (= 156).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
155
●● Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail
application is not configured to block email from relevant domains,
which may prevent you from receiving the notification message.
●● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 1 (= 168).
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
configure the setting.
●● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(= 127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
3
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
zzFrom a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
2
Configure the Web service you want
to use.
zzOn the computer or smartphone, display
the Web service settings screen.
].
Before Use
] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzThe Web service settings are now
updated.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Registering Other Web Services
Choose [
zzPress the [
P Mode
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
] button.
Playback Mode
2
Wireless Features
Choose the destination.
zzChoose the icon of the Web service to
connect to (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
zzIf multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzFollow the on-screen instructions to
complete settings for Web services you
want to use.
156
3
Send an image.
zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
zzWhen uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ] button to return to the
playback screen once [OK] is displayed
after the image is sent.
●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (= 160).
●● To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (= 147).
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
2
Before Use
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
Choose [
].
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Choose [Add a Device].
Wireless Features
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
zzThe camera SSID and password are
displayed.
Appendix
Index
157
4
Connect the printer to the network.
zzIn the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
zzIn the password field, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
5
Choose the printer.
zzChoose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
7
]
Access the printing screen.
zzPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button again.
8
●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
●● To connect without entering a password in step 4, choose MENU
(= 31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Password] > [Off]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID
screen (in step 3).
●● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (= 147).
●● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(= 127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Print the image.
zzFor detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (= 191).
Accessories
zzTo end the connection, press the [ ]
button, choose [OK] on the disconnection
confirmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
158
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send and receive images between
them as follows.
●● Only Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras can be connected via Wi-Fi.
You cannot connect to a Canon camera unless it is Wi-Fi compatible,
even if it supports Eye-Fi cards.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zzPress the [
2
Choose [
] button.
].
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
zzAlso follow steps 1 – 3 on the target
camera.
zzCamera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
4
Send an image.
zzTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
zz[Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzTo end the connection, press the
] button, choose [OK] on the
[
confirmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (= 160, = 162).
●● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(= 127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
159
2
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
1
Choose [Select and send].
zzOn the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
zzTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Advanced Guide
zzRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
Camera Basics
zzAfter you finish choosing images, press
] button.
the [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
3
P Mode
Send the images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
Choose a selection method.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a selection method.
Choose an image.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [ ] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
zzFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (= 160), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Selecting a Range
Accessories
1
Choose [Select Range].
zzFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (= 160), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
160
2
Choose images.
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 122) to specify images.
zzTo include movies, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send the images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
Sending Favorite Images
Send only images tagged as favorites (= 126).
1
Choose [Favorite Images].
zzFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (= 160), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
zzAn image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, choose the image and press the
[ ] button to remove [ ].
zzAfter you finish choosing images, press
] button, choose [OK], and
the [
then press the [ ] button.
2
●● In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
Notes on Sending Images
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
Other Shooting Modes
●● For movies that you do not compress (= 135), a separate,
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
P Mode
●● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[ ] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
Wireless Features
●● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Send the images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
161
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
●● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
●● Choosing [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
●● Movies cannot be resized.
●● Image size can also be configured in MENU (= 31) > [ 4] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Resize for Sending].
Sending Images Automatically (Image
Sync)
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to
email recipients or social networking services. The number of characters
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web
service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
zzOn the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
3
Add a comment (= 32).
Send the image.
●● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
●● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
Basic Guide
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Initial Preparations
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Preparing the Camera
Other Shooting Modes
Register [ ] as the destination. On the destination computer, you will
install and configure Image Transfer Utility, free software compatible with
Image Sync.
1
Adding Comments
Before Use
P Mode
Add [ ] as a destination.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzAdd [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(= 154).
Playback Mode
zzTo include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (= 154), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
2
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
Index
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] (= 31).
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
]
162
Sending Images
Preparing the Computer
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.
1
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
Install Image Transfer Utility.
zzInstall Image Transfer Utility on a
computer connected to the Internet
by following steps 1 – 2 of “Installing
CameraWindow” (= 149).
1
zzImage Transfer Utility can also be
downloaded from the Image Sync
settings page of CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (= 162).
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Send images.
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images
to Web Services” (= 156) and choose
[ ].
zzSent images are labeled with a [
Register the camera.
zzWindows: In the taskbar, right-click [
and then click [Add new camera].
zzMac OS: In the menu bar, click [
then click [Add new camera].
Before Use
],
], and
zzA list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera to send images from.
zzOnce the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [ ].
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
] icon.
Save the images to the computer.
P Mode
zzImages are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzImages are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
●● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
Appendix
Index
163
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
●● Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing
the Computer” (= 163).
●● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
●● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (= 154), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
●● Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
●● Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
●● For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
Camera Basics
●● Geotag images as you shoot (= 164)
●● Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (= 165)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (= 144, = 146, = 167).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Geotagging Images When You Shoot
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Still images and movies you shoot can be geotagged using GPS
information (such as latitude, longitude, and elevation) from a Bluetooth
enabled smartphone. You can review the recorded GPS information on
the camera (= 113). Using the software (= 189), you can also view
the locations on a map, with the still images and movies shown next to
them.
1
Pair the camera and smartphone via
Bluetooth (= 142).
2
Choose [GPS settings].
zzPress the [
] button, choose [GPS
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
164
3
Configure the setting.
zzChoose [GPS via Mobile], and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Enable].
4
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a
Smartphone
Basic Guide
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi
Shoot.
zzThe still images and movies you shoot
are now geotagged using smartphone
GPS information, which you can check as
described in “GPS Information Display”
(= 113).
zzNext time, after starting Camera Connect
on your smartphone, make sure the
camera and smartphone are connected
via Bluetooth before shooting.
●● Images are not geotagged this way unless Camera Connect is
running.
●● The GPS information added to your movie is acquired initially,
when you start shooting.
●● GPS information cannot be updated unless Wi-Fi is off.
●● The GPS information added to images in remote live view
shooting is acquired initially, when you switch to a Wi-Fi
connection.
●● Images may not be geotagged if you connect via NFC or
Bluetooth when the camera is off.
●● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
●● GPS acquisition status is indicated by one of the following icons.
] Acquiring, [
] Not acquiring
[
●● To check the GPS information acquired from the smartphone,
choose MENU (= 31) > [ 4] tab > [GPS settings] > [GPS
information display].
Before Use
Advanced Guide
You can take shots or record movies as you view a shooting screen on
your smartphone.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow viewing
of all images from the smartphone (= 146).
1
Other Shooting Modes
Secure the camera.
P Mode
zzKeep the camera still by mounting it on a
tripod or taking other measures.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Connect the camera and
smartphone (= 146).
Playback Mode
zzIn the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
3
Wireless Features
Choose remote live view shooting.
zzIn Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Remote live view shooting].
Setting Menu
zzOnce the camera is ready for remote
live view shooting, a live image from the
camera is displayed on the smartphone.
Accessories
zzAt this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
4
Appendix
Index
Shoot.
zzUse the smartphone to shoot.
165
●● Focusing may take longer.
●● Image display or shutter release may be delayed, depending on
the connection status.
●● Any rough subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
●● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and transfer images from the camera.
4
Shoot and switch images.
zzUse the smartphone to shoot in Shooting
mode and switch images in Playback
mode.
●● [Bluetooth remote controller] is not available when connected via
Wi-Fi.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● You can check the Bluetooth connection status by referring to the
icon on the screen (= 142).
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth
Other Shooting Modes
You can use a Bluetooth enabled smartphone for remote shooting and
switching of image display. This is convenient if you want to connect
quickly while shooting, or if you will control playback while connected to a
TV.
1
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Prepare the camera.
Playback Mode
zzSet the shooting mode and the shooting
functions on the camera.
Wireless Features
zzKeep the camera still by mounting it on
a tripod or taking other measures when
shooting.
2
Setting Menu
Connect the camera and
smartphone (= 142).
Accessories
zzMake sure that the Bluetooth connection
has been established.
3
Choose Bluetooth remote controller.
Appendix
Index
zzIn Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Bluetooth remote controller].
zzThe smartphone screen changes to a
screen for remote control via Bluetooth.
166
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
zzPress the [
] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the device to edit.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose the item to edit.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
zzThe items you can change depend on the
device or service.
Before Use
Connection
Configurable Items
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(= 167)
O
[View Settings] (= 168)
–
O
–
–
–
[Erase Connection Info] (= 167)
O
O
O
O
–
O : Configurable
O
O
–
O
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
– : Not configurable
Changing a Device Nickname
Other Shooting Modes
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
P Mode
zzFollowing step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (= 167), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (= 32), and then enter a
new nickname.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
zzFollowing step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (= 167), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
zzThe connection information will be
erased.
167
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones
Specify whether all images on the camera’s memory card can be viewed
from smartphones connected to the camera.
zzChoose [View Settings] in step 4
of “Editing Connection Information”
(= 167) and choose the desired option.
●● For remote live view shooting, choose [On].
3
Change the nickname.
zzPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (= 32), and then enter a
nickname.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
●● You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you first use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Camera Nickname
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Choose [Wireless settings].
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(= 31).
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
2
Choose [Nickname].
Accessories
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Nickname], and then
press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
168
Returning the Wireless Settings to Default
Return the wireless settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the wireless settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all wireless settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(= 31).
Clearing Information of Devices Paired via
Bluetooth
Before pairing with a different smartphone, clear the information about any
connected smartphones.
1
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Bluetooth settings].
Camera Basics
zzPress the [
] button and choose
[ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth
settings].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Restore the default settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
zzThe wireless settings are now reset.
●● To reset settings other than wireless settings to defaults, choose
[Reset camera] on the [ 5] tab (= 177).
2
Choose [Check/clear connection
info].
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Check/clear connection
info], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Clear the information.
Wireless Features
zzOn the [Check/clear connection info]
screen, press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
zzAfter [Clear information about devices
you have connected to] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Clear the camera information.
zzIn the Bluetooth setting menu on the
smartphone, clear the camera information
registered on the smartphone.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
169
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Before Use
MENU (= 31) settings on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3], [ 4], and [ 5] tabs
can be configured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for
greater convenience.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Date-Based Image Storage
Setting Menu
Camera Basics
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzChoose [Create Folder] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose [Daily].
Other Shooting Modes
zzImages will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
P Mode
greater convenience
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
File Numbering
Playback Mode
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns file numbers.
Wireless Features
zzChoose [File Numbering] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose the desired option.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory
cards, or when a new folder is created.
Index
170
●● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted, = 171) memory card.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
zzChoose [Format] on the [ 1] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [OK].
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Format the memory card.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK] after the confirmation
message, and then press the [ ] button
to start formatting.
zzWhen formatting is finished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [ ] button.
●● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Low-Level Formatting
Other Shooting Modes
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before lowlevel formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (= 171), press the [ ]
button to choose [Low Level Format]. A
[ ] icon is displayed.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
zzFollow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (= 171) to continue with the
formatting process.
●● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (= 171), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
●● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
171
Changing the Video System
Resetting the Electronic Level
Before Use
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.
zzChoose [Video system] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose an option.
zzChoose [Electronic level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Switching the Color of Screen Information
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (= 103) to help you
level the camera in advance.
Make sure the camera is level.
zzPlace the camera on a flat surface, such
as a table.
2
Advanced Guide
]
zzChoose [Reset], and then press the [
button.
zzChoose [OK], and then press the [
button.
1
Basic Guide
Still Images
Other Shooting Modes
Movies
P Mode
Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color
suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is
useful in modes such as [ ] (= 67).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzChoose [Night Display] on the [ 2] tab,
and then choose [On] (= 31).
Playback Mode
zzTo restore the original display, choose
[Off].
Wireless Features
Calibrate the electronic level.
Setting Menu
zzChoose [Electronic level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzTo adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [ ] button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
zzChoose [OK], and then press the [
button.
●● You can also return the setting to [Off] by holding down the [
button for at least one second.
Accessories
]
Appendix
Index
]
172
Using Eco Mode
Power-Saving Adjustment
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Adjust the timing of automatic deactivation of the camera, screen, and
viewfinder (Auto Power Down, Display Off, and Viewfinder Off (= 27)).
zzChoose [Power Saving] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Configure the setting.
] is now shown on the shooting
zz[
screen (= 204).
2
Shoot.
zzTo activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzChoose an item, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to configure the setting.
zzChoose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [On].
zzThe screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
Before Use
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● [Display Off] and [Auto Power Down] cannot be configured when
Eco Mode (= 173) is set to [On].
P Mode
Screen Brightness
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Screen and viewfinder brightness can be set separately. Before
adjustment, make sure the display to adjust is activated.
Playback Mode
zzChoose [ 2] tab > [Disp. Brightness],
press the [ ] button, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the brightness.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
least one second. (This will override the [Disp. Brightness] setting
on the [ 2] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and
hold the [ ] button again for at least one second or restart the
camera.
Appendix
Index
173
3
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
1
Specify your home time zone.
zzChoose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
zzWhen configuring this setting for the first
time, make sure [ Home] is selected,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
zzTo set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
zzPress the [
2
] button.
Specify your destination.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
zzIf necessary, specify daylight saving time
as in step 1.
zzPress the [
Switch to the destination time zone.
Before Use
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [
] button.
Basic Guide
zz[ ] is now shown on [Time Zone] and
shooting screens (= 204).
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (= 22) will
automatically update your [ Home] time and date.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Date and Time
Other Shooting Modes
Adjust the date and time as follows.
P Mode
zzChoose [Date/Time] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Lens Retraction Timing
Setting Menu
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [
] button in Shooting mode (= 26). To have the lens retracted
] button, set the retraction timing to
immediately after you press the [
[0 sec.].
zzChoose [Lens Retraction] on the [ 2] tab,
and then choose [0 sec.].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
] button.
174
Display Language
Adjusting the Volume
Change the display language as needed.
Before Use
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
Basic Guide
zzChoose [Language ] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzChoose [Volume] on the [ 3] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, press the [ ]
button, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to adjust the volume.
●● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing
] button.
the [
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customizing Sounds
Other Shooting Modes
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
zzChoose [Mute] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [Enable].
zzChoose [Sound Options] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
P Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose an option, press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to change the sound.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [
(= 37) cannot be changed.
●● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [
]
button as you turn the camera on.
●● Sound is not played during movies (= 111) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button or
drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing
the [ ][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down quickly.
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
] mode
Setting Menu
Start-Up Screen
Accessories
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
Appendix
zzChoose [Start-up Image] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
Index
]
175
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu
(= 30) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
zzChoose [Hints & Tips] on the [ 3] tab,
and then choose [Off].
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (= 35), the
MF indicator (= 89), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
zzChoose [Units] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [ft/in].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon
List shooting modes on the selection screen by icon only, without mode
names, for faster selection.
zzChoose [Mode icon size/info] on the [ 3]
tab, and then choose [Small, no info].
Other Shooting Modes
Checking Certification Logos
P Mode
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzChoose [Certification Logo Display] on
the [ 5] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel
Setting Menu
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased to respond to a
lighter touch, or you can disable touch control.
Accessories
zzChoose [ 4] tab > [Touch Operation], and
then choose the desired option.
zzTo increase touch-screen panel
sensitivity, choose [Sensitive], and to
disable touch control, choose [Disable].
Appendix
Index
176
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
zzChoose [Copyright Info] on the [ 5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ]
button to access the keyboard, and enter
the name (= 32).
] button. When [Accept
zzPress the [
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
zzThe information set here will now be
recorded in images.
●● To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button.
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
zzFollow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(= 177) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted.
●● [Wi-Fi connect’n] ([ 4] tab) (= 141)
●● [Wireless settings] ([ 4] tab) (= 141)
●● [GPS settings] ([ 4] tab) (= 164)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● [Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)] ([ 5] tab) (= 108)
Camera Basics
Restoring Default Camera Settings
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Restoring All Camera Defaults
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Access the [Basic settings] screen.
zzChoose [Reset camera] on the [ 5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
zzChoose [Basic settings], and then press
the [ ] button.
Wireless Features
2
Setting Menu
Restore default settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Accessories
zzAll camera defaults are now restored.
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
177
●● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
-- [ 1] tab setting [Video system] (= 172)
-- [ 2] tab settings [Time Zone] (= 174) and [Date/Time]
(= 174)
] (= 175)
-- [ 3] tab setting [Language
-- Shooting mode (= 56)
-- Exposure compensation (= 78) setting
-- Wireless settings (= 141)
-- Calibrated value for the electronic level (= 172)
-- Copyright information (= 177)
-- Face ID information (= 45)
3
Restore default settings.
Before Use
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Basic Guide
zzDefault function settings are now
restored.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions
P Mode
Settings for the following functions can be restored to defaults individually.
●● User settings for custom shooting modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Copyright information
●● Calibrated value for the electronic level
Playback Mode
●● Face ID information
Wireless Features
●● Wireless settings
1
Access the [Other settings] screen.
Setting Menu
zzChoose [Reset camera] on the [ 5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Other settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
2
Choose the function to reset.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the function to reset, and
then press the [ ] button.
178
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result of such
malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Accessories
Other Shooting Modes
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
P Mode
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
separately
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
179
System Map
Before Use
Flash Units
Included Accessories
Neck Strap
Strap Adapter
Lens Cap
Lens Cap Cord
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Battery Pack
NB-13L*1
Speedlite*4
600EX II-RT/600EX-RT/600EX/430EX III-RT/
430EX III/430EX II/270EX II
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Cases
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*1
Other Shooting Modes
Waterproof Case
WP-DC56
P Mode
Other Accessories
USB Cable
(camera end: Micro-B)*2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Memory Card
Card Reader
Computer
Remote Switch
RS-60E3
Timer Remote
Controller
TC-80N3*5
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Lens Accessories
Cables
Accessories
HDMI Cable
(camera end: Type D)*3
TV/Video
System
Lens Hood
LH-DC110 (with cap)
Power
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Also available for purchase separately.
A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).
Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
The following accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX II, 580EX,
430EX, 320EX, 270EX, and 220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2 and ST-E3-RT,
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2, and Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Requires Remote Controller Adapter RA-E3.
Appendix
Index
Compact Power Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
180
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Power Supplies
●● The battery charger and compact power adapter can be used in
areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
●● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Flash Units
Battery Pack NB-13L
zzRechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
zzCharger for Battery Pack NB-13L
●● The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or fire, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
●● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that ▲ is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
▲ is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/
CA-DC30E
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Speedlite 600EX II-RT/600EX-RT/
600EX/430EX III-RT/430EX III/
430EX II/270EX II
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzShoe-mounted flash unit that enables
many styles of flash photography.
Speedlite 580EX II, 580EX, 430EX,
320EX, 270EX, and 220EX are also
supported.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
Wireless Features
zzPrevents unnatural shadows next to
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Setting Menu
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2/ST-E3-RT
Accessories
zzEnables wireless control of slave
Speedlite flash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
Appendix
Index
zzInsert the included battery pack into the
camera for charging. Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU (sold separately) is required
to connect the adapter to the camera.
181
Other Accessories
Printers
Waterproof Case WP-DC56
zzFor underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
zzFor connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Remote Switch RS-60E3
zzEnables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
Before Use
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
zzEven without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Photo and Movie Storage
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Connect Station CS100
zzA media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3
Wireless Features
zzSet a self-timer or interval timer, or
control the camera in other ways.
Note that Remote Controller Adapter
RA-E3 (sold separately) is required
in order to connect the timer remote
controller to the camera.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Lens Hood LH-DC110 (with cap)
zzPrevents extraneous light from entering
the lens and causing flares or ghosting,
which reduce image quality.
Index
182
4
Using Optional Accessories
Turn the camera on.
zzPress the [
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2
ft., with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
quality of [
], [
], [
], [
], [
], [
], or
[
] can be viewed in high definition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
Before Use
] button.
zzImages from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
zzWhen finished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Some information may not be available when using a TV as the
display (= 205).
●● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzOn the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
zzSwitch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
183
3
Charging via USB
The battery pack can be charged without removing it from the camera by
using Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E and Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU, both sold separately.
1
Insert the battery pack.
zzFollow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (= 20)
to open the cover.
zzInsert the battery pack as described in
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Your Memory Card” (= 20).
zzFollow step 3 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (= 20)
to close the cover.
2
(1)
(2)
Connect the compact power adapter
to the camera.
zzWith the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the
interface cable (sold separately) facing
as shown and insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal (2).
zzInsert the larger plug of the interface
cable into the compact power adapter.
Charge the battery pack.
zzCA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the compact power adapter into a power
outlet (2).
zzCA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the
compact power adapter, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzCharging begins and the USB charge
lamp lights up.
Other Shooting Modes
zzThe lamp turns off when charging
finishes.
P Mode
zzRemove the compact power adapter from
the power outlet and the interface cable
from the camera.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
●● When charging another battery pack, always disconnect the
interface cable from the camera before replacing the battery pack
for charging.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
184
●● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Power” (= 225).
●● You can view images even while the battery is charging, by
turning the camera on and entering Playback mode (= 24).
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.
●● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Before Use
Movies
To reduce the amount of extraneous light entering the lens, you can attach
optional Lens Hood LH-DC110.
zzMake sure the camera is off.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzAlign the lens hood threads with the
camera threads and turn the lens hood in
the direction shown.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzMake sure not to attach the lens hood too
tightly. Doing so could prevent removal of
the lens hood and damage the camera.
Other Shooting Modes
zzTo remove the lens hood, turn it in the
opposite direction.
P Mode
●● Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in flash when the lens
hood is attached.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the
interface cable into a computer’s USB terminal in step 2 of “Charging
via USB” (= 184). For details about USB connections on the
computer, refer to the computer user manual.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
●● When charging is finished, the indicator on the back of the camera
blinks green. However, the indicator also blinks green if the computer
enters sleep or other modes and charging is interrupted.
●● Charging stops and the indicator goes off if, after you begin
charging, you press the power button to turn the camera off.
●● With some computers, battery charging may require the memory
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera
(= 20) before connecting the cable to the computer’s USB
port.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
185
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
1
Connect the remote switch.
zzMake sure the camera is off.
zzOpen the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
Using a Timer Remote Controller
(Sold Separately)
Still Images
Shoot.
zzTo shoot, press the release button on the
remote switch.
Movies
To set a self-timer or interval timer or control the camera in other
ways, you can use optional Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3. This is
convenient in time-lapse photography of blooming flowers, for example.
Note that a remote controller adapter (RA-E3, sold separately) is required
in order to connect the timer remote controller to the camera.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Also refer to the TC-80N3 instruction manual for additional
information.
1
2
Before Use
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Connect the timer remote controller
to the remote controller adapter.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzConnect the timer remote controller to the
remote controller adapter as shown.
2
Playback Mode
Connect the adapter to the camera.
zzMake sure the camera is off.
Wireless Features
zzOpen the terminal cover and insert the
adapter plug.
Setting Menu
3
Shoot.
Accessories
zzTurn the camera on.
zzTo shoot, operate the timer remote
controller.
Appendix
Index
186
3
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
More sophisticated flash photography is possible with an optional
Speedlite EX series flash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the
optional Speedlite 320EX flash is available.
●● This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series
functions.
●● Non-EX series Canon flash units may not fire correctly or may not
fire at all, in some cases.
●● Use of non-Canon flash units (especially high-voltage flash units)
or flash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and
may damage the camera.
Speedlite EX Series
Movies
These optional flash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of
flash photography needs.
1
Attach the flash.
zzMake sure the camera is off, and then
attach the flash unit to the hot shoe.
2
],
zzIn other modes, the flash is adjusted and
fired automatically, as needed.
4
Configure the external flash.
zzPress the [
Control] on the [
the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
] button, choose [Flash
5] tab, and then press
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzOptions already set on the flash itself are
displayed.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then set the
desired option.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
zzAvailable items vary depending on the
shooting mode and the flash attached
(= 188).
●● Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional
information.
Still Images
Choose shooting mode [ ], [
[
], or [ ].
Turn the flash on, and then turn the
camera on.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●● Settings for the built-in flash cannot be configured while a
Speedlite EX series flash is attached, because that setting screen
is no longer accessible.
●● You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [ ] button
for at least one second.
●● [Flash Control] is not available when the 600EX II-RT, 600EX-RT,
600EX, or 580EX II has been set up for stroboscopic flash.
●● 320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie
recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [ ] icon is shown.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
zzA red [ ] icon is now displayed.
zzThe flash pilot lamp will light up when the
flash is ready.
187
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
zzUsing the optional Speedlite Bracket
SB-E2 can help prevent unnatural
shadows next to subjects during vertical
shooting.
zzTo keep the screen out of the way of the
bracket, use the screen closed and facing
outward.
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
The following items are available in [ ], [
], [
], or [ ] mode. In
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Lamp] can be configured. (With
autoflash control, the flash always fires.) However, external flash units do
not fire in modes that the built-in flash does not fire (= 207).
Item
Options
Shooting Mode
Auto*1
O
O
O
O
Manual*2
O
O
O
O
Flash Exp. Comp*3
–3 to +3
O
O
O
O
Flash Output*4
1/128*5 – 1/1
(in 1/3-stop increments)
O
O
O
O
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-speed
O
O
O
O
Wireless Func.*6
Off/Optical/Radio
O
O
O
O
Flash Mode
Red-Eye Lamp
Safety FE*
7
On/Off
O
O
O
O
On
O
O
O
O
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Clear Flash Settings*8
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
E-TTL mode is used for the flash.
M mode is used for the flash.
In [ ] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the flash. In this case,
when the flash fires, flash exposure compensation set on the flash is applied to
the flash output level set on the camera.
Can be configured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and flash exposure
compensation set on the flash is [+0]. When you adjust flash exposure
compensation on 600EX II-RT, 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II
Speedlites, the camera display will be updated accordingly.
Can be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the
flash unit.
1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX.
Configure other options on the flash unit itself. Available with Speedlite
600EX II-RT/600EX-RT/600EX/580EX II/90EX. When this item is not set to [Off],
[Shutter Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2ndcurtain], it will be changed to [1st-curtain].)
Can only be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].
Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Safety FE]
and [Red-Eye Lamp] from [ 5] tab > [Reset camera] > [Basic settings] on the
camera (= 177).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● In [
] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping,
Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting
scenes determined by the camera are not displayed, and the
camera does not shoot continuously (= 40).
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
188
Using the Software
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
●● CameraWindow
-- Import images to your computer
-- Add Picture Styles saved on your computer to the camera
●● Image Transfer Utility
-- Set up Image Sync (= 162) and receive images
●● Map Utility
-- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
●● Digital Photo Professional
-- Browse, process, and edit RAW images
●● Picture Style Editor
-- Edit Picture Styles and create and save Picture Style files
●● To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by
the camera.
●● Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
Installing the Software
Before Use
Install the software as described in steps 1 – 2 of “Installing
CameraWindow” (= 149).
Saving Images to a Computer
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Connect the camera to the
computer.
Other Shooting Modes
zzWith the camera turned off, open the
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable
in the orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzConnect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Display CameraWindow.
Accessories
zzMac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
Appendix
Index
For detailed software system requirements and compatibility information
(including support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
189
zzWindows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
zzOn the screen displayed, click the change
].
program link of [
zzChoose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
zzDouble-click [
3
].
Save the images to the computer.
●● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
●● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
-- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
-- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
-- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
-- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
-- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image file sizes.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
Playback Mode
zzImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
zzAfter images are saved, close
] button to
CameraWindow, press the [
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
zzTo view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
190
4
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots and configure a variety of settings used for your printer
or photo printing services by connecting the camera to a PictBridgecompatible printer with a cable.
A Canon SELPHY CP printer is used in this example of PictBridge
printing. Also refer to your printer user manual.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).
Choose an image.
Before Use
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
5
Access the printing screen.
zzPress the [
press the [
6
]
] button, choose [
] button again.
], and
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Print the image.
Other Shooting Modes
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
zzTo print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 4 after
printing is finished.
zzOpen the terminal cover and insert the
smaller plug fully into the camera terminal
in the orientation shown.
zzWhen you are finished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
zzConnect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
Basic Guide
P Mode
zzPrinting now begins.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
●● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (= 182).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3
Turn the printer on.
191
Configuring Print Settings
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
1
Movies
Access the printing screen.
zzFollow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(= 191) to access this screen.
2
Configure the settings.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose an option (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button to return to the
printing screen.
Default
Date
File No.
Both
Off
Default
Matches current printer settings.
Prints images with the date added.
Prints images with the file number added.
Prints images with both the date and file
number added.
–
Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting
to print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1
Corrects red-eye.
No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print
(= 192).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other
details (= 193).
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Settings” (= 192) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
zzA cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Other Shooting Modes
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
P Mode
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzTo move the frame, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Playback Mode
zzTo rotate the frame, turn the [
zzWhen finished, press the [
3
] dial.
Wireless Features
] button.
Setting Menu
Print the image.
zzFollow step 6 in “Easy Print” (= 191)
to print.
●● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
192
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
1
Available Layout Options
Movies
Choose [Paper Settings].
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Settings” (= 192) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
Before Use
Default
Matches current printer settings.
Bordered
Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless
Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up
Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identification purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L
and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Choose a type of paper.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
]
zzWhen choosing [N-up], press the [ ]
button. On the next screen, choose the
number of images per sheet (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
1
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Choose [ID Photo].
Playback Mode
zzFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(= 193), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose a layout.
Advanced Guide
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
3
Basic Guide
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Choose the long and short side
length.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose the length (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Print the image.
zzFollow step 6 in “Easy Print” (= 191)
to print.
193
3
Choose the printing area.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Cropping], and then press
the [ ] button.
zzFollow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (= 192) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
zzFollow step 6 in “Easy Print” (= 191)
to print.
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
1
Movies
Access the printing screen.
zzFollow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(= 191) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. On the
next screen, choose an option (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button to
return to the printing screen.
3
Print the image.
zzFollow step 6 in “Easy Print” (= 191)
to print.
Movie Printing Options
Single
Before Use
Prints the current scene as a still image.
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, file
Sequence
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button again.
●● After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of
“Playback” (= 111), you can also access the screen in step 1
here by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ] in the movie
control panel and then pressing the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Playback Mode
Batch printing (= 196) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Appendix
Index
194
Configuring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print
list.
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [
4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print Settings], and then
press the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose and configure items as needed
(= 31).
Standard
Print Type
Date
File No.
Clear DPOF
data
One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are printed.
On
Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
On
Images are printed with the file number.
Off
–
On
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
Off
–
●● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
●● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
●● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridgecompatible printers (sold separately).
●● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [ 2] tab (= 22).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
zzPress the [
] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [
4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],
and then press the [ ] button (= 31).
2
Playback Mode
Choose an image.
Wireless Features
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
zzIf you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
195
3
Specify the number of prints.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
zzTo set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
zzWhen finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
] button
Movies
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 195), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 122) to specify images.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Before Use
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 195), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Clearing All Images from the Print List
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
zzWhen images have been added to the
print list (= 194 – = 196), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
zzAny DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Movies
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 195), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
196
2
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and using CameraWindow to import them to your
computer (= 189), where they are copied to their own folder. This
is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing
photobooks with your own printer.
Choose an image.
zz[
] is displayed.
zzTo remove the image from the photobook,
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
zzRepeat this process to specify other
images.
Choosing a Selection Method
zzPress the [
] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [
4] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
zzWhen finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Adding Images Individually
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button
Other Shooting Modes
Adding All Images to a Photobook
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 197), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Setting Menu
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
1
Before Use
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Movies
Choose [Select].
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 197), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
Still Images
Accessories
Movies
zzFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 197), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
Appendix
Index
zzPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
197
Troubleshooting
Before Use
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following. If
the issue persists, contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Basic Guide
Power
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
Confirm that the battery pack is charged (= 19).
Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (= 20).
Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (= 20).
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
Appendix
●●
●●
●●
●●
Helpful information when using the camera
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
●● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
●● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
The lens is not retracted.
Wireless Features
●● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (= 20).
Setting Menu
The battery pack is swollen.
●● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a
Customer Support Help Desk.
Accessories
Appendix
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or are not displayed on a TV (= 183).
Index
198
Shooting
Subjects in shots look too dark.
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 96).
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 78).
Adjust brightness by using the Auto Lighting Optimizer (= 82).
Use AE lock or spot metering (= 78, = 79).
●● In Playback mode (= 111), press the shutter button halfway (= 27).
●●
●●
●●
●●
Strange display on the screen under low light (= 29).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
Cannot shoot.
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
●● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
-- The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (= 49).
[ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (= 38).
[
●●
●●
●●
●●
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (= 38).
Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (= 53).
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 96).
Increase the ISO speed (= 80).
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (= 53).
Shots are out of focus.
●● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (= 27).
●● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (= 223).
●● Set [AF-assist beam firing] to [Enable] (= 54).
●● Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
●● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (= 91, = 95).
Shots are blurry.
●● Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
●● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing
the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before pressing the shutter
button halfway (or pressing it halfway repeatedly).
●●
●●
●●
●●
Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 35).
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 78).
Use AE lock or spot metering (= 78, = 79).
Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (= 38).
●● Shoot within flash range (= 223).
●● Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
output level (= 97, = 102).
●● Increase the ISO speed (= 80).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●● Shoot within flash range (= 223).
●● Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 35).
●● Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
output level (= 97, = 102).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
White spots appear in flash shots.
●● This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.
Wireless Features
Shots look grainy.
●● Lower the ISO speed (= 80).
●● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (= 56).
Setting Menu
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
Accessories
●● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (= 55). The red-eye reduction lamp (= 4)
will light up for flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
●● Edit images using red-eye correction (= 131).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
Appendix
Index
●● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 171).
Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.
●● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available
in Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Set Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (= 207 –
= 212).
199
The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.
●● The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in
face information (= 45). If the icons still are not displayed even when you set
the birthday, re-register face information (= 45), or make sure that the date/
time is set correctly (= 174).
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
●● Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
●● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(= 171).
[
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
●● The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
-- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 171).
-- Lower the image quality (= 51).
-- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording.
Zooming is not possible.
●● Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (= 67).
●● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [
(= 74) modes.
Subjects look distorted.
] (= 65) and [
]
●● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
●● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
files or alter the folder structure.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (= 171).
●● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
●● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Sound is not played during movies.
●● Adjust the volume (= 24) if you have activated [Mute] (= 175) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
●● No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] (= 65), [ ] (= 68), [ ]
(= 74), or [ ] (= 75) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen.
●● Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
●● Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
Setting Menu
●● In simple information display mode (= 113), choose an image that shows the
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
screen (= 136).
Accessories
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
●● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (= 26).
Appendix
Index
200
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
●● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [
] button
-- Press the [
down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu.
●● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
●● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new
devices/destinations (= 167).
●● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (= 154).
●● To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (= 146).
●● To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (= 149,
= 150).
●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
●● Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (= 225). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
●● The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
●● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
●● RAW images cannot be sent to the camera or displayed on TV sets. RAW images
selected for transferring to a smartphone are transferred as JPEG images.
However, RAW images can be sent using Image Sync.
●● Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if
you move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images
sent using Image Sync via an access point (= 162). Before moving or renaming
these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Cannot resize images for sending.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
●● Movies cannot be resized.
P Mode
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (= 162).
●● Movies may take a long time to send.
●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
No notification message is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
Setting Menu
●● Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
●● Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are configured to
block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notification
message.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (= 169).
201
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
●● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (= 20).
Memory card locked
●● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (= 20).
Cannot record!
●● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (= 20).
Memory card error (= 171)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (= 2) and have inserted it facing the correct way (= 20),
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufficient space on card
●● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (= 35, = 56,
= 77, = 99) or edit images (= 128). Either erase unneeded images
(= 123) or insert a memory card with enough free space (= 20).
Touch AF unavailable
●● Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (= 207).
Touch AF canceled
●● The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (= 95).
Charge the battery (= 19)
No Image.
●● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
●● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
●● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Unselectable image./No identification information
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info* (= 119), Magnify* (= 120), Rotate* (= 125), Favorites (= 126),
Edit* (= 128), Print List* (= 194), and Photobook Set-up* (= 197).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Invalid selection range
●● When specifying a range for image selection (= 122, = 125, = 196), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.
P Mode
Exceeded selection limit
●● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (= 194) or Photobook Set-up
(= 197). Choose 998 images or less.
●● Print List (= 194) or Photobook Set-up (= 197) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (= 121), Erase
(= 123), Favorites (= 126), Print List (= 194), or Photobook Set-up (= 197).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Naming error!
●● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [ 1] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(= 170), or format the memory card (= 171).
Setting Menu
Accessories
Lens Error
●● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate damage. In this case,
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Appendix
Index
Protected! (= 121)
202
A camera error was detected (error number)
●● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate damage. In this case, write
down the error number (Exx) and contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
File Error
●● Correct printing (= 191) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
●● Check the paper size setting (= 193). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
●● Contact a Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber
replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
●● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (= 150).
●● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
●● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
●● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
●● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
●● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
●● Check the access point security settings (= 150).
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
●● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
●● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens and other
devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
●● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending failed
Memory card error
Camera Basics
●● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Receiving failed
Insufficient space on card
Other Shooting Modes
●● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufficient space.
P Mode
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
●● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
Playback Mode
Receiving failed
Naming error!
Wireless Features
●● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Setting Menu
Insufficient space on server
Accessories
●● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
●● Use Image Transfer Utility to save the images sent by the Image Sync (= 162)
server to your computer.
Check network settings
Appendix
Index
●● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
IP address conflict
●● Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.
203
On-Screen Information
(17) Connected via Bluetooth to a
smartphone and acquiring GPS
information (= 164)
(18) Battery level (= 204)
Shooting (Information Display)
(19) Still image compression (= 50),
Recording pixel setting (= 50)
The same information is shown on the viewfinder.
(15)
(18)
(22)
(17)
(16) (19) (20) (21) (23)
(38)
(39)
(5)
(7)
(9)
(11)
(13)
(14)
(40)
(24) (25)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(8)
(10)
(12)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(41) (42) (43) (44)
(45) (46) (47) (48)
(49)
(31) (32)
(33) (34)
(35)
(36) (37)
(50)
(1)
Shooting mode (= 207), Scene
icon (= 39)
(2)
Flash mode (= 96)
(8)
Drive mode (= 44), AEB
shooting (= 81), Focus
bracketing (= 90)
Eco mode (= 173)
(20) Recordable shots
(21) Maximum continuous shots
(32) Shutter speed (= 99, = 100)
(33) Aperture value (= 100)
(34) Electronic level (= 52)
(36) Highlight tone priority (= 82)
(39) Camera shake warning (= 38)
(23) Movie quality (= 51)
(41) Wind filter (= 74)
(24) Remaining time
(42) Time zone (= 174)
(25) Histogram (= 113)
(43) Image stabilization (= 53)
(26) Quick Set menu (= 30)
(44) Display mode (= 28)
(27) Focus range (= 88, = 89),
AF lock (= 95)
(45)
Auto level (= 53)
(46)
Auto slow shutter (= 73)
(28) Movie AE lock (= 72)
(47) Attenuator (= 74)
(29) AF frame (= 91), Spot AE point
frame (= 79)
(48) Exposure simulation (= 78)
(5)
Touch Shutter (= 44)
(12) White balance correction (= 84)
Sufficient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufficient
(13) Auto Lighting Optimizer (= 82)
(15) Bluetooth connection status
(= 142)
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Accessories
(11) Picture Style (= 85)
(14) Self-timer (= 42)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Battery Level
Metering mode (= 79)
ND filter (= 81)
P Mode
Setting Menu
(4)
High ISO speed noise reduction
(= 80)
Other Shooting Modes
(50) Exposure compensation (= 78)
Flash exposure compensation /
Flash output level (= 97, = 102)
(6)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(49) MF indicator (= 89)
(3)
(7)
Camera Basics
(38) Hybrid Auto mode (= 37)
(9)
(10) White balance (= 83)
Advanced Guide
(37) ISO speed (= 80)
(40) Zoom bar (= 35)
(31) AE lock (= 78), FE lock
(= 97)
Basic Guide
(35) Exposure level (= 100)
(22) Zoom magnification (= 42),
Digital tele-converter (= 91)
(30) Grid lines (= 103)
Before Use
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display
(Blinking red)
[Charge the battery]
Appendix
Details
Index
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon
Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately
(16) IS mode icon (= 41)
204
During Playback
Info Display 2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Info Display 1
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
(1)
Current image / Total images
(8)
Protection (= 121)
(2)
Battery level (= 204)
(9)
(3)
Wi-Fi signal strength (= 141)
Folder number - File number
(= 170)
(4)
Bluetooth connection status
(= 142)
(5)
Image Sync complete (= 162)
(6)
Edited*1 (= 128, = 129,
= 130, = 131)
(7)
Favorites (= 126)
*1
*2
(10) Shutter speed (= 99, = 100)
(11) Aperture value (= 100)
(12) Exposure compensation level
(= 78)
(13) ISO speed (= 80)
(14) Image quality*2 (= 50)
Displayed for images with a creative filter, resizing, cropping, or red-eye
correction applied.
Cropped images are labeled with [ ].
P Mode
(1)
Shooting date/time (= 21)
(13) Metering mode (= 79)
(2)
Histogram (= 113)
(14) Auto Lighting Optimizer (= 82)
(3)
Shooting mode (= 207)
(4)
Shutter speed (= 99, = 100)
(15) ND filter (= 81), Short clip
playback effect (= 74),
Miniature movie playback speed
(= 65), Frame rate/interval time
of time-lapse movies (= 75) or
star time-lapse movies (= 68),
Star emphasis (= 67), Star
trails shooting time (= 67)
(5)
Aperture value (= 100)
(6)
Exposure compensation level
(= 78)
(7)
ISO speed (= 80)
(8)
Highlight tone priority (= 82)
(9)
White balance (= 83)
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
(16) High ISO speed noise reduction
(= 80)
(10) White balance correction
(= 84)
Appendix
(17) Focus range (= 88)
(18) Red-eye correction (= 131)
(11) Picture Style setting details
(= 85)
(19) Image quality* (= 50)
Index
(20) Recording pixel setting
(12) Flash exposure compensation
(= 97)
* Cropped images are labeled with [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
(21) Image size
].
205
Info Display 3
Shows GPS information and an RGB histogram. Information on the top of
the screen is the same as for Info Display 2.
Info Display 4
Shows white balance information. Information on the top of the screen is
the same as for Info Display 2.
Info Display 5
Shows Picture Style information. Information on the top of the screen is
the same as for Info Display 2.
Summary of Movie Control Panel
Before Use
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Playback” (= 111).
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Basic Guide
] to
Advanced Guide
Play
Camera Basics
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (= 135) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [
Other Shooting Modes
]
P Mode
] button.)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (= 135) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Playback Mode
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie (= 135) is selected,
or an album without background music (= 137))
Wireless Features
Edit (= 134)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (= 191).
Setting Menu
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
Accessories
●● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Appendix
Index
206
Functions and Menu Tables
Before Use
Basic Guide
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Advanced Guide
Shooting Mode
Function
/
Camera Basics
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
*2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
AUTO
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
100 – 25600
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
–
O
–
O
*3
*3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
External Flash Firing (= 188)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
Flash Exposure Compensation (= 97)
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
*4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Flash Output Level (= 102)
*1
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Aperture Value
*1
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
Shutter Speed
*1
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
Exposure Compensation (= 78)
ISO Speed (= 80)
Drive Mode (= 44)
Flash (= 96)
Av/Tv Settings
(= 99, = 100)
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Program Shift (= 78)
*1
*5
*5
*5
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*5
O
AE Lock/FE Lock*6 (= 78, = 97)
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
Bulb Setting
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
207
Shooting Mode
Function
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
AE Lock (during recording)/Exposure
Compensation (= 72, = 78)
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
AF Lock by touching during movie recording
(= 72)
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
Optical Zoom
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
AF Lock (when assigned to controls other
than the movie button (= 105))
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
AF Lock (when assigned to the movie button
O
(= 105))
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
Other Shooting Modes
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P Mode
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
Center
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Periphery
Focus Range
(= 58, = 88, = 89)
Manual Focus Switching When Recording
Movies (= 72)
Move AF Frame
(= 91)
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
*7
*7
*7
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Touch AF (= 95)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
*7
*7
*7
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Face Select (= 94)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
–
Touch Shutter (= 44)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*8
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
*8
*8
O
O
*8
–
O
O
*8
–
–
–
–
Change Display (= 29)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
Set in [Brightness].
Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases.
Adjusted to suit the [Brightness] setting.
Aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO speed may be changed
automatically to maintain suitable exposure.
*6 FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode.
*7 Only when [ ] is selected.
*8 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
208
Quick Set Menu
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
AF method (= 91)
AF operation (= 93)
Image quality (= 50)
Movie
rec. size
(= 51)
When Set
to PAL
Self-Timer Settings
Advanced Guide
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
*2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
See “Shooting Tab” (= 212).
When Set
to NTSC
Self-Timer (= 42)
Basic Guide
/
/
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*3
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*3
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*3
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*3
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
4
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Shots*5
*1
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
/
Custom
Timer
P Mode
*1
Delay*
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
209
Function
Shooting Mode
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
ND Filter (= 81)
White balance
(= 83)
/
/
/
/
/
/
WB correction (= 84)
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Other Shooting Modes
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
WB correction (Underwater) (= 58)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Color Adjustment (= 70)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
Set color temp. (= 84)
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
Picture Style (= 85)
Metering mode
(= 79)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
(= 82)
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
210
Function
Shooting Mode
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
Still Image Aspect Ratio
(= 49)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*1
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
*6
O
*6
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
*6
–
*6
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
] when subject movement is detected.
[
Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (= 49).
Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
Set automatically to suit the aspect ratio of the movie recording size.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
211
Shooting Tab
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
Advanced Guide
Rec. Mode (= 56, = 59, = 72)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Image quality (= 50)
*1
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
JPEG
/
RAW
/
/
/
/
–
Still Image Aspect Ratio
Shooting information display (= 103)
1
Basic Guide
/
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Screen
Custom display 1/
info/ toggle Custom display 2/
settings
No info display
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
VF info/
toggle
settings
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Wireless Features
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
Setting Menu
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Brightness/ Brightness/
*1
RGB
RGB
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Display
size
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Enable
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Disable
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
No info display/
Custom display 1/
Custom display 2
VF vertical On
display
Off
Grid
display
Histogram
Expo.
simulation
(= 78)
/6x4
3x3
3x3+diag
Large/
Small
/
Playback Mode
Accessories
Appendix
Index
212
Shooting Mode
Function
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
1
Reverse
Display
(= 21)
On
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Power
Saving
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
Camera Basics
Smooth
*1
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display 1/Display 2
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off/Hold
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Enable
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
Disable
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Center/
AF frame
Touch
pos’n
point
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
Display Mode Display
priority
(= 28)
VF display
format
(= 28)
Image review
(= 55)
Touch Shutter
(= 44)
2
Touch & drag
AF settings
(= 104)
Touch
Shutter
Touch &
drag AF
Enable
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Disable
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Pos’n
method
Absolute/
*1
Relative
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Active
touch
area
Whole
panel/
Right/
Left/
*1
Top right/
Btm. right/
Top left/
Btm. left
Advanced Guide
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Index
213
Shooting Mode
Function
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
Face ID
Settings
(= 45)
Function Assignment (= 105)
2
Face ID
On/Off
AF/AE lock
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
Shutter/AE lock AF/AF lock, no
*1
AE lock
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
AE lock/AF
AE/AF, no AE
lock
Dials
/
button
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
button
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Quick setting menu layout (= 107)
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
214
Shooting Mode
Function
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
Digital Zoom
(= 42)
Standard
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
Off
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1.6x/2.0x
3
AF operation
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
AF method
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
AF Frame
Size*2
(= 91)
AF+MF
(= 94)
AF-assist
beam firing
(= 54)
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Normal
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Small
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
On/Off
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Enable
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
Disable
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Continuous AF Enable
(= 93)
Disable
Advanced Guide
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
215
Shooting Mode
Function
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
MF-Point
Zoom
(= 89)
Off
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
5x/10x
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
Safety MF
(= 89)
On
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Off
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
On
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Peaking
MF Peaking
Settings
(= 90)
4
Off
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Level
Low/
High
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Color
Red/
Yellow/
Blue
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
Off
IS Mode
IS Settings
(= 98)
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Continuous *1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
Shoot
Only
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
Wireless Features
Low
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Setting Menu
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
Dynamic
Standard *1
IS
–
High
Auto level
(= 53)
Advanced Guide
Enable
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
Disable
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Playback Mode
Accessories
Appendix
Index
216
Shooting Mode
Function
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
Bracketing
(= 90)
ISO speed (= 80)
ISO Speed
ISO Auto
Settings
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Advanced Guide
See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (= 207).
Rate of
Change
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
Standard *1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Fast/
Slow
*1
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
Disable
Enable
Auto Lighting Optimizer (= 82)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
Metering mode (= 79)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
ND Filter (= 81)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
Flash Control (= 55, = 97, = 98, = 102)
Flash Mode
Auto
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
Manual
*1
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (= 207).
Flash Output
See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (= 207).
Red-Eye Lamp
Safety FE
Color Adjustment
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
1st-curtain
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
2nd-curtain
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
On
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
On
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Playback Mode
Flash Exp. Comp
Shutter Sync.
Camera Basics
*1
Max ISO Speed
Highlight
tone priority
(= 82)
5 *5
/
*1
Appendix
Index
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
217
Function
Shooting Mode
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
White balance (= 83)
Custom WB (= 83)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
WB correction (= 84)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
Picture Style (= 85)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
6 *6 High ISO speed NR Standard
(= 80)
Low/High
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Spot AE Point
(= 79)
Center/
AF Point
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Safety shift
(= 100)
On
*1
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Off
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
218
Shooting Mode
Function
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
Self-Timer
Digest Type
(= 37)
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
Include Stills/
No Stills
Star Emphasis Sharp/Soft
(= 67)
Off
Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting (= 68)
7 *7
Save
Stills
Effect*3
Enable/Disable
Advanced Guide
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Camera Basics
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Other Shooting Modes
/
/
/
/
P Mode
Time-lapse movie settings (= 75)
Shot
Interval
15 sec./30 sec./
1 min.*4
Frame
Rate
NTSC:
PAL:
Shooting
Time
60 min./90 min./
Unlimited
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto
exposure
Lock to 1st shot/
For each shot
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Shooting
scene
Scene 1/Scene 2/
Scene 3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
Interval/
Shots
2-4 sec./
30-900 (Scene 1)
5-10 sec./
30-720 (Scene 2)
11-30 sec./
30-240 (Scene 3)
–
Exposure
Fixed/For each shot
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
Review
image
Enable/Disable
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Appendix
O
Index
219
Function
Shooting Mode
Before Use
/
Basic Guide
Movie rec. size (= 51)
Wind Filter (= 74)
8
Attenuator (= 74)
Auto slow shutter
(= 73)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
See “Quick Set Menu” (= 209).
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
O
O
O
O
Off
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Off/On
*1
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Enable
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Disable
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
Only available when the AF method is [1-point AF].
Available when still saving is set to [Disable].
Available when the effect is set to [Off].
] mode. Items from the
Items from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in [
[ 7] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ], and [ ]. Items
from the [ 6] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in [ ] mode.
*6 Items from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ],
and [ ]. Items from the [ 7] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes:
], [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
],
[
[ ], and [ ].
], [
],
*7 Items from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 7] tab in these modes: [
], and [ ].
[ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
- Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (= 45) may not be displayed in
some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.
O
O
Auto
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
220
Set Up Tab
Tab
1
2
3
4
Tab
Item
Reference Page
Create Folder
= 170
File Numbering
= 170
Format
= 171
Video system
= 172
Display settings
= 28
Electronic level
= 52
Start-up Image
= 175
Eco Mode
= 173
Power Saving
= 27
Disp. Brightness
= 173
Night Display
= 172
Time Zone
= 174
Date/Time
= 174
Lens Retraction
= 174
Language
= 175
Mute
= 175
Volume
= 175
Sound Options
= 175
Hints & Tips
= 176
Mode icon size/info*1
= 176
Touch Operation
= 176
Units
= 176
Wi-Fi connect’n
= 141
Wireless settings
= 141
GPS settings
= 164
5
*1
*2
*3
Item
Reference Page
Certification Logo Display
= 176
Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)*2
= 108
Copyright Info
= 177
Reset camera*3
= 177
Not available in these modes: [
], [
].
[
], [
Not available in these modes: [
Only [Other settings] is available in [
], [
], [
] and [
], [
], [
], [
], and [
] modes.
], [
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
], and
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
My Menu Tab
Tab
1
Item
Reference Page
Add My Menu tab
= 109
Delete all My Menu tabs
= 110
Delete all items
= 110
Menu display
= 110
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
221
Playback Tab
Tab
1
Item
Reference Page
Protect
= 121
Rotate
= 125
Erase
= 123
Favorites
= 126
Slideshow
2
3
4
5
= 136
List/Play Digest Movies
= 114
Short Clip Mix
= 139
Image Search
= 116
Creative filters
= 130
Resize
= 128
Cropping
= 129
Red-Eye Correction
= 131
Face ID Info
= 115
RAW img processing
= 132
Print settings
= 195
Photobook Set-up
= 197
Transition Effect
= 111
Index Effect
= 115
Scroll Display
= 111
Group Images
= 118
Auto Rotate
6
= 121
Story Highlights
= 126
Resume
= 111
Image jump w/
= 117
Set Touch Actions
= 127
Playback information display
= 113
Handling Precautions
Before Use
●● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
Basic Guide
●● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic fields. Strong electromagnetic fields
may cause malfunction or erase image data.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
●● To maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal
cover, memory card/battery cover, and all other covers firmly closed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to
help prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from
getting inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt
from getting inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust,
water, and salt to get on the camera.
Other Shooting Modes
●● If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If
dirt, dust, or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, wellwrung wet cloth.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
P Mode
Playback Mode
●● Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may
cause a malfunction.
Wireless Features
●● Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust,
water, or salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
Setting Menu
●● If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that
moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly
consult the nearest Customer Support Help Desk.
Accessories
●● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
●● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Appendix
Index
●● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
222
Shutter
Specifications
Image Sensor
Image size.........................................APS-C
Camera Effective Pixels
(Pixels may decrease due to image
processing) ..........................................Approx. 24.2 megapixels
Total pixels.........................................Approx. 25.8 megapixels
Lens
Focal Length
(35mm film equivalent)...........................15.0 - 45.0 mm (24 - 72 mm)
Zoom Magnification...........................3x
Focus
Range
–
Other
modes
Maximum Wide Angle
( )
Maximum Telephoto
( )
10 cm ‒ infinity
(3.9 in. – infinity)
30 cm ‒ infinity
(11.8 in. – infinity)
10 cm ‒ infinity
(3.9 in. – infinity)
30 cm ‒ infinity
(11.8 in. – infinity)
10 – 50 cm
(3.9 in. ‒ 1.6 ft.)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Aperture
Other Shooting Modes
F number
Wide angle.........................................2.8 - 16.0
Telephoto...........................................5.6 - 16.0
P Mode
Flash
Shooting Range (measured from the tip of the lens)
Shooting
Mode
Shutter Speed
Auto Mode (automatic settings)
Max. Tv..........................................1 sec.
Min. Tv...........................................1/2000 sec.
Range in all shooting modes
Max. Tv..........................................30 sec.
Min. Tv...........................................1/2000 sec.
Before Use
–
Step Zoom.........................................24 mm, 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm,
72 mm
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Built-in Flash
Flash range (Max. wide angle)
closest point...................................Approx. 50.0 cm (approx. 1.6 ft.)
farthest point..................................Approx. 9.0 m (approx. 29.5 ft.)
Flash range (Telephoto end)
closest point...................................Approx. 50.0 cm (approx. 1.6 ft.)
farthest point..................................Approx. 4.5 m (approx. 14.8 ft.)
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Viewfinder/Monitor
Electronic color viewfinder
Screen Size.......................................0.39 type
Pixels.................................................Approx. 2.36 million dots
Appendix
Index
Monitor
Type...................................................TFT color liquid crystal
Screen Size.......................................3.0 type
Effective Pixels..................................Approx. 1.04 million dots
223
Shooting
Digital zoom
Magnification.....................................Approx. 4x
Maximum with optical zoom..............Approx. 12x
Focal Length (Telephoto end,
35mm film equivalent)............................Approx. 288 mm equivalent
Continuous Shooting
Shooting speed*
One-Shot AF
High-speed Continuous
shooting speed..........................Max approx. 9.0 shots/sec.
Servo AF
High-speed Continuous
shooting speed..........................Max approx. 7.0 shots/sec.
Recording
Before Use
File Format.............................................DCF-compliant DPOF compatible
(Version1.1)
Basic Guide
Data Type
Still Images
Recording Format..........................Exif2.3 (DCF2.0)
Image (RAW images taken while
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
shooting are A/D converted into
12-bit format.)...................................JPEG/RAW (CR2 a Canon 14-bit
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
RAW format)
Movies
Recording Format..........................MP4
Video.............................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio.............................................MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
* Continuous shooting speed may become slower due to the following factors:
Tv value/Av value/Subject conditions/Brightness/Shooting with flash/Zoom
positions/Battery level
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
224
Power
Interface
Battery Pack..........................................NB-13L
Number of Still Image
Shots (CIPA compliant:
room temperature
23°C / 73°F)
Number of Still Image
Shots (Eco Mode On)
Approx. 200 shots
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 250 shots
Movie Recording Time
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 45 min.
(CIPA compliant: room
Approx. 45 min.
temperature 23°C / 73°F) Viewfinder On
Movie Recording Time
(Continuous Shooting)
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 80 min.
Viewfinder On
Playback Time*
* Time when playing back a slideshow of still images
Basic Guide
Wired
Digital terminal
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 200 shots
Viewfinder On
Before Use
Approx. 80 min.
Approx. 4 hr.
(Hi-Speed USB compliant) .....................Micro USB
HDMI OUT terminal...........................Type D
Advanced Guide
Wireless
NFC ..................................................NFC Forum Type3/4 Tag compliant
(Dynamic)
Bluetooth
Compliance standards ..................Bluetooth Ver. 4.1
(Bluetooth low energy technology)
Transmission scheme....................GFSK modulation scheme
Wi-Fi
Compliance standards ..................IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Transmission frequency
Frequency..................................2.4 GHz
Channels...................................1 – 11
Security
Infrastructure mode ..................WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), WEP
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
* Wi-Fi Protected Setup compliant
Camera access point mode ......WPA2-PSK (AES)
Ad hoc mode ............................WPA2-PSK (AES)
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
225
Operating Environment
Temperature ..........................................Min. 0 °C, max. 40 °C
(Min. 32 °F, max. 104 °F)
Dimensions (CIPA Compliant)
W...........................................................Approx. 115.0 mm (approx. 4.5 in.)
H............................................................Approx. 77.9 mm (approx. 3.1 in.)
D............................................................Approx. 51.4 mm (approx. 2.0 in.)
Weight (CIPA Compliant)
Camera Body Only................................Approx. 375 g (approx. 13.2 oz.)
Including Battery Pack, Memory Card.....Approx. 399 g (approx. 14.1 oz.)
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type:
Nominal voltage:
Nominal capacity:
Charging cycles:
Operating temperatures:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
3.6 V DC
1250 mAh
Approx. 300 times
0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Rated input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
Rated output:
4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Charging time:
Operating temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Rated input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)
Rated output:
5.0 V DC, 0.55 A
Charging time: Approx. 2 hr. 50 min.* (when charged with
NB-13L in the camera)
Playback Mode
Operating temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Accessories
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
*Charging time varies greatly depending on the
remaining battery level.
●● Size, weight, and number of shots available are based on
measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products
Association (CIPA).
●● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
Appendix
Index
●● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
226
Index
A
Accessories 181
AEB shooting 81
AE lock 78
AF frames 91
AF lock 95
AF method 91
Art bold effect (shooting mode) 63
Aspect ratio 49
Auto Lighting Optimizer 82
Auto mode (shooting mode) 23, 35
Auto power down 27
Av (shooting mode) 100
B
Batteries → Date/time
(date/time battery)
Battery charger 181
Battery pack
Charging 19
Eco mode 173
Level 204
Power saving 27
Bluetooth 141
C
Camera
Resetting 177
Camera access point mode 148
Camera Connect 142
CameraWindow 189
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 154
Clock 34
Color (white balance) 83
Compression 50
Connecting via an access point 150
Continuous shooting 40, 44
Creative filters 130
Cropping 129, 192
Custom white balance 83
D
Date/time
Changing 22
Date/time battery 22
Settings 21
World clock 174
Defaults → Resetting
Digital tele-converter 91
Digital zoom 42
Display language 23
DPOF 194
Dragging 17
E
Eco mode 173
Editing
Cropping 129
Red-eye correction 131
Resizing images 128
Editing or erasing connection
information 167
Electronic level 52
Erasing 123
Erasing all 124
Error messages 202
Exposure
AE lock 78
Compensation 78
FE lock 97
F
Face ID 45
Face select 94
Favorites 126
FE lock 97
File numbering 170
Fireworks (shooting mode) 57
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 63
Flash
Deactivating flash 96
Flash exposure compensation 97
On 96
Slow synchro 96
Focus bracketing 90
Focus check 120
Focusing
AF frames 91
AF lock 95
MF peaking 90
Servo AF 93
Touch AF 95
Focus lock 91
Focus range
Macro 88
Manual focus 89
Quick 58
Underwater macro 58
FUNC. menu layout 108
G
Geotagging images 164
GPS information display 113
Grainy B/W (shooting mode) 62
H
Handheld night scene
(shooting mode) 57
HDMI cable 183
High dynamic range
(shooting mode) 66
High ISO speed noise reduction 80
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 37
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
I
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image quality → Compression
Images
Display period 55
Erasing 123
Playback → Viewing
Protecting 121
Image stabilization 53, 98
Image Sync 162
Indicator 33, 54, 55
ISO speed 80
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
J
Jump display 117
Setting Menu
M
Macro (focus range) 88
Magnified display 120
Manual focus (focus range) 89
Manual (movie mode) 102
Memory cards 2
Menu
Basic operations 31
Table 207
Metering mode 79
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 65
Accessories
Appendix
Index
227
Movies
Editing 134
Image quality (recording pixels/
frame rate) 51
N
ND filter 81
Neck strap → Strap
P
P (shooting mode) 77
Package contents 2
Panning (shooting mode) 61
Panoramic shot (shooting mode) 60
Photobook set-up 197
PictBridge 182, 191
Picture Style 85
Playback → Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 56
Power 181 → Battery charger
→ Battery pack
Power saving 27
Printing 191 → Printing
Program AE 77
Protecting 121
Q
Quick (focus range) 58
Quick Set menu 209
R
RAW 50
RAW image processing 132
Recording pixels (image size) 50
Red-eye correction 131
Remote live view shooting 165
Resetting 177
Resizing images 128
Rotating 125
S
Saving images to a computer 189
Screen
Display language 23
Icons 204, 205
Menu → Quick Set menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→ Memory cards
Searching 116
Self portrait (shooting mode) 59
Self-timer 42
2-second self-timer 43
Customizing the self-timer 43
Sending images 159
Sending images to another
camera 159
Sending images to a smartphone 142
Sending images to Web services 154
Servo AF 93
Shooting
Shooting date/time → Date/time
Shooting information 204
Shooting information
Long exposure 103
Short clips (movie mode) 74
Slideshow 121
Smooth skin (shooting mode) 60
Soft focus (shooting mode) 62
Software
Installation 149, 189
Saving images to a computer 189
Sounds 175
Standard (movie mode) 72
Star (shooting mode) 67
Star nightscape
(shooting mode) 67
Star time-lapse movie
(shooting mode) 68
Star trails (shooting mode) 67
Story Highlights 136
Strap 2
W
T
Z
Terminal 183, 191
Time-lapse movie (shooting mode) 75
Touch Actions 127
Touch AF 95
Touching 17
Touch-screen panel 17
Touch Shutter 44
Toy camera effect (shooting mode) 64
Traveling with the camera 174
Troubleshooting 198
TV display 183
Tv (shooting mode) 99
Water painting effect
(shooting mode) 64
White balance (color) 83
Wi-Fi 141
Wind filter 74
Wireless features 141
World clock 174
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Zoom 23, 36, 42, 88
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
U
Setting Menu
Underwater macro (focus range) 58
Underwater (shooting mode) 58
Accessories
V
Viewing 24
Image search 116
Index display 115
Jump display 117
Magnified display 120
Single-image display 24
Slideshow 121
TV display 183
Appendix
Index
228
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or
Others)
• Countries and Regions Permitting Wireless Function Use
-- Use of wireless functions is restricted in some countries and regions,
and illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations.
To avoid violating wireless regulations, visit the Canon website to
check where use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
wireless function use in other countries and regions.
• Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
-- Altering or modifying the product
-- Removing the certification labels from the product
• Before goods or technologies in the camera regulated by the Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade Act are exported (which includes bringing
them outside Japan or showing them to non-residents in Japan), export
or service transaction permission may be required from the Japanese
government.
• Because this product includes American encryption items, it falls under
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or
brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
• Be sure to make notes of the Wi-Fi settings you use.
The wireless settings saved to this product may change or be erased due
to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or static
electricity, or accident or malfunction.
Please note that Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or
indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting from a degradation or
disappearance of content.
• When transferring ownership, disposing of the product, or sending it for
repair, restore the default wireless settings by erasing any settings you
have entered.
• Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product
due to loss or theft of the product.
• Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless function of this product within the guidelines
noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss
if the function and product are used in ways other than as described in
this guide.
• Do not use the wireless function of this product near medical equipment
or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless function near medical equipment or other electronic
equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
• This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time
as this product.
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
• Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to
connect to other unknown networks.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
229
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
• Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
• Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
Third-Party Software
• expat.h
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• AES-128 Library
Copyright (c) 1998-2008, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights
reserved.
Other Shooting Modes
LICENSE TERMS
The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes) is
allowed without the payment of fees or royalties provided that:
1. ‌source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer;
2. ‌binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in their documentation;
3. ‌the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products built
using this software without specific written permission.
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties in
respect of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or
fitness for purpose.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
230
Personal Information and Security Precautions
If personal information and/or Wi-Fi security settings, such as passwords,
etc., are saved on the camera, please be aware that such information and
settings may still remain in the camera.
When transferring the camera to another person, disposing of it, or sending
it for repair, be sure to take the following measures to prevent the leakage
of such information and settings.
• Erase registered personal information by choosing [Erase Info] in the
Face ID settings.
• Erase registered Wi-Fi security information by choosing [Reset Settings]
in the Wi-Fi settings.
Trademarks and Licensing
• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Disclaimer
Camera Basics
• Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
• All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
• Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specifications and appearance.
Other Shooting Modes
• Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
P Mode
• The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
• App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Wireless Features
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
Setting Menu
• Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Accessories
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
• The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in
the United States and in other countries.
Appendix
Index
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
231